H2O Analizer

2-Pack Analyzer
System
(H2S & H2O)
Operator’s Manual
4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

2-Pack Analyzer
System
H2S & H2O Analyzer
Operator’s Manual
This manual applies to firmware versions:
FS 5.13, v2.50
Products of
4333 W Sam Houston Pkwy N, Suite 100

Houston, TX 77043-1223
Tel: 800.619.2861
Fax: 713.856.6623
www.spectrasensors.com
Copyright © 2013 SpectraSensors, Inc. No part of this manual may be reproduced in

whole or in part without the express written permission of SpectraSensors, Inc.
SpectraSensors reserves the right to change product design and specifications at any
time without prior notice.
Revision History
Revision Engineering Order Date

H EO14658 2/23/12
I ECR15049 12/11/12
J ECR15053 12/12/12
K ECR15339 8/15/13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
1: Introduction
Who Should Read This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How to Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SpectraSensors Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
About the Gas Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
How the Analyzers Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Wavelength Modulation Spectroscopy (WMS) Signal Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
2: Installation
What Should be Included in the Shipping Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Inspecting the Analyzer and SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Getting Familiar with the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Analyzer electronics assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Hardware and Tools for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Mounting the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
To mount the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Connecting Electrical Power to the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
To connect electrical power to the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Field Interface Loads (Solenoid Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
To connect electrical power to the enclosure heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
To connect the H2S analyzer signal and alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
To connect the H2O analyzer signal and alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
To change the H2S analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink . . . . . . . . . 2-19
To change the H2O analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Connecting the Gas Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
To connect the sample supply lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
To connect the sample/bypass returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
To connect the pneumatic valve source (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Application of Conduit Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Connecting the Validation Gas (If Applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
To connect the validation source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Conditioning the SCS Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
3: Sample Conditioning System

About the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Checking the SCS Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
To perform SCS installation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Starting up the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
To prepare for SCS startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
To start up the sample system heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
To start up the field pressure reducing station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
To start up the sample bypass stream on process sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Operator’s Manual i
2-Pack H2S/H2O Analyzer System
To start up the analyzer on process sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Shutting Down the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . 3-7
To isolate the SCS for short-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Periodic SCS Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Servicing the H2S Scrubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
To replace the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Disposal of Used Scrubbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
4: Operating the H2S Analyzer

Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Powering Up the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
To power up the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Powering Down the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
To power down the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Modes Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Mode 1: (Normal Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Mode 2: (Set Parameter Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Mode 3: (Scrubber Life Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Mode 4: (System Diagnostic Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Mode 5: (Analog Output Test Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Mode 6: (Diagnostic Data Download) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Mode 7: (Measure Port1 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Mode 8: (Measure Port2 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Mode 9: (Recall Validation Results) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Mode TEST: (Analog Input Test Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Changing Measurement and Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
To change parameters in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Measurement and Control Parameters Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
2 Way Com Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-20 mA Alarm Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-20 mA Val Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
AI 4 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
AI 20 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
AI Pressure Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
AO 4 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
AO 20 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
AO 4-20 mA Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Calculate Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Cancel Val Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Concentration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Custom Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Daily Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Dew Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
DO Alarm Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
General Alarm DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
High Alarm Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Keypad Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Logger Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Low Alarm Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Modbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
New Scrub Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Pipeline Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
ii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table of Contents
Pressure Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Process Purge Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Rapid Change Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
RATA (Relative Accuracy Test Audit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
RATA Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
RATA Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Set Time - Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Set Time - Hour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Set Time - Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Set Time - Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Set Time - Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Start Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Temperature Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Val 1 Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Val 2 Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Val Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Val Auto DumpSpectrm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Val Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Validation Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Val Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Val Perm Constant Kp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Val Perm Rate Rp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Val Purge Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Val Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Zero Val Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
To adjust the analyzer reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
To scale the current loop signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
User Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Historical Alarm Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Assignable Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Validating the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
To validate automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
To validate semi-automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Calibrating the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
5: Firmware FS 5.13 Serial Port Communications

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
To launch HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
To capture and save data from the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Modbus Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Framing/Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Endianness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
To enable Modbus communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
6: Ethernet Communications
Configuring the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
To configure the ethernet port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Operator’s Manual iii

Setup Mode: Server Configuration (Option 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Set Gateway IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Change Telnet Configuration Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
DHCP Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Setup Mode: Channel Configuration (Option 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
I/F (Interface) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Connect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
a) Incoming Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
b) Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
c) Active Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
d) Datagram Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
e) Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Send the Escape Sequence (+++) in Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Show IP addr after 'RING' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Auto Increment Source Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Remote IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
DisConnMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Flush Mode (Buffer Flushing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Pack Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Packing Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Trailing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Send Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
DisConnTime (Inactivity Timeout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Send Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Telnet Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Channel (Port) Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Expert Settings (Option 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
TCP Keepalive time in seconds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
ARP Cache timeout in seconds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Disable Monitor Mode at bootup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
MTU Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Enable alternate MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Ethernet connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Security Settings (Option 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Disable Telnet Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Disable TFTP Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Disable Port 77FE (Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Disable ECHO Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Enable Enhanced Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Disable Port 77F0 (Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Default Settings (Option 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
To enter Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Monitor Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
7: Operating the H2O Analyzer

Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Powering Up the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
To power up the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Powering Down the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
To power down the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
iv 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table of Contents
Modes Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Mode 1: (Normal Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Mode 2: (Change Parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Mode 3: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Mode 4: (Diagnostic Parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Mode 5: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Mode 6: (Export Diagnostic Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Mode 7: (Validation Measurements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Mode 8: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Mode TEST: (System Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Changing Measurement and Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
To change parameters in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Measurement and Control Parameters Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
# Spectrum Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
4-20 mA Alarm Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
4-20 mA % Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
4-20 mA Val Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
4 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
20 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Analyzer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Component ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Concen Unit Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Concentration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
DO Alarm Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
DO Alarm Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Logger Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Low Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Main Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Modbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Pressure Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Sample ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
S Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
S Factor Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Temperature Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
User Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Validation Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
To adjust the analyzer reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
To scale the current loop signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Faults/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Validating the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
To validate manually (if applicable):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Calibrating the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
8: Firmware v2.50 Serial Port Communications

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
To launch HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
To capture and save data from the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
To import the data file into Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Modbus Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Framing/Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Operator’s Manual v
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Endianness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
To enable Modbus communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Appendix A: Specifications
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Appendix B: Troubleshooting the Analyzer

Gas Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
To keep the sampling lines clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Cleaning the Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Tools and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
To clean the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Stainless steel mirror replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Excessive Sampling Gas Temperatures and Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (FS 5.13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
To reset the Peak Tracking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (v2.50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
To check the PkDf and PkD1 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
To reset Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Instrument Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Service Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Return Material Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Appendix C: Water Correlation

Water Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Dew Point Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Raoult’s Law. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Arden Buck Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
ASTM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
ASTM2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Method Comparisons for Natural Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
The Arden Buck Method Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Appendix D: Certifications of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
vi 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1–1. Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption spectrometer............ 1-4

Figure 1–2. Typical raw signal from a laser diode absorption spectrometer
with and without mirror contamination........................................ 1-5
Figure 1–3. Typical normalized absorption signal from a laser diode
absorption spectrometer ........................................................... 1-5
Figure 1–4. Typical normalized 2f signal where the species concentration
is proportional to the peak height............................................... 1-6
Figure 2–1. General system hardware outline ............................................... 2-2

Figure 2–2. H2S analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal
terminal block and alarm relays ................................................. 2-4
Figure 2–3. H2S analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal
Figure 2–4. H2O analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal
Figure 2–5. H2O analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal
Figure 2–6. AC single phase (120 VAC) connection terminal block in
analyzer electronics enclosure ................................................. 2-11
Figure 2–7. AC split phase (240 VAC) connection terminal block in
electronics enclosure .............................................................. 2-11
Figure 2–8. DC connection (24 VDC) terminal block in analyzer
electronics enclosure .............................................................. 2-12
Figure 2–9. AC connection terminal block for 120 VAC enclosure heater ......... 2-13
Figure 2–10. AC connection terminal block for 240 VAC enclosure heater ......... 2-14
Figure 2–11. Mating terminal block (TB2) for connecting signal cables ............. 2-16
Figure 2–12. H2S analyzer relay driver and 4-20 mA board stack .................... 2-20
Figure 2–13. 4-20 mA board ..................................................................... 2-20
Figure 3–1. Predicted scrubber lifetime based on average H2S load ............... 3-12
Figure 3–2. Scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator................................. 3-13
Figure 3–3. H2S scrubber/dryer efficiency indicator before and after
breakthrough ........................................................................ 3-14
Figure 4–1. H2S keypad (FS 5.13 Firmware) ................................................. 4-4

Figure 4–2. LCD display with alarm code visible indicating Pressure
Low Alarm fault ..................................................................... 4-38
Figure 5–1. Connection Description window (FS 5.13).................................... 5-2

Figure 5–2. Connect To window (FS 5.13) .................................................... 5-2
Figure 5–3. COM Properties window (FS 5.13) .............................................. 5-3
Figure 5–4. Hyperterminal window with streaming data (FS 5.13) ................... 5-3
Figure 5–5. Sample diagnostic data output (FS 5.13)..................................... 5-4
Operator’s Manual vii

Figure 7–1. H2O analyzer keypad (v2.50 Firmware)....................................... 7-3
Figure 8–1. Connection Description window (v2.50) ...................................... 8-2

Figure 8–2. Connect To window (v2.50)....................................................... 8-2
Figure 8–3. COM Properties window (v2.50) ................................................. 8-3
Figure 8–4. Hyperterminal window with streaming data (v2.50) ...................... 8-3
Figure 8–5. Sample Mode 6 data output (v2.50) ........................................... 8-6
Figure 8–6. Opening a data file in Excel ....................................................... 8-8
Figure 8–7. Setting data type in Text Import Wizard ..................................... 8-8
Figure 8–8. Setting Tab and Comma as delimiters......................................... 8-9
Figure 8–9. Highlighting imported data for plotting in Excel ............................ 8-9
Figure 8–10. Chart Wizard - Step 1 window ..................................................8-10
Figure 8–11. Data file plot in Excel...............................................................8-10
Figure 8–12. Format Data Series window ......................................................8-11
Figure A–1. Standard outline schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system.................. A-3

Figure A–2. Standard Outline schematic (side view) of 2-Pack
analyzer system ...................................................................... A-4
Figure A–3. Standard flow schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system...................... A-5
Figure A–4. Standard electrical schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system ............... A-6
Figure B–1. Measurement cell types ............................................................ B-3

Figure B–2. Stainless steel mirror marking ................................................... B-3
Figure B–3. Stainless steel mirror - mirror side up......................................... B-7
Figure C–1. Comparison of calculation results for ASTM1 [8], ASTM2 [9]
and ISO [10] methods with experimental data from the GERG
report [14] for mixture NG1 .................................................... C-11
Figure C–5. Courses of measured water contents at 60 bar for natural
gas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7 ..................................... C-13
viii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2–1. H2S analyzer fuse specifications ................................................. 2-3

Table 2–2. H2O analyzer fuse specifications................................................. 2-3
Table 2–3. H2S analyzer input/output signal connections............................. 2-16
Table 2–4. H2O analyzer input/output signal connections ............................ 2-18
Table 4–1. Typical values for parameter setpoints ........................................ 4-9

Table 4–2. Assignable Alarm functionality ................................................. 4-20
Table 4–3. LCD display alarm codes ......................................................... 4-38
Table 5–1. Modbus register map [FS 5.13]................................................ 5-11

Table 5–2. Status flags........................................................................... 5-19
Table 5–3. ASCII Character Map .............................................................. 5-20
Table 6–1. BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options....................................................... 6-2

Table 6–2. Standard IP network netmasks .................................................. 6-3
Table 6–5. Flow control options ................................................................. 6-5
Table 6–3. Interface Mode options ............................................................. 6-5
Table 6–4. Common Interface Mode settings ............................................... 6-5
Table 6–6. Reserved port numbers............................................................. 6-6
Table 6–7. Connect Mode options .............................................................. 6-7
Table 6–8. Modem Mode messages .......................................................... 6-11
Table 6–9. Modem Mode commands......................................................... 6-11
Table 6–10. Disconnect Mode options......................................................... 6-14
Table 6–11. Flush Mode options ................................................................ 6-15
Table 6–12. Pack Control options............................................................... 6-16
Table 6–13. Default settings ..................................................................... 6-20
Table 6–14. Monitor Mode commands ........................................................ 6-22
Table 6–15. Command response codes....................................................... 6-23
Table 7–1. Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer] ................... 7-7
Table 7–2. Secondary digital output functionality ....................................... 7-13
Table 8–1. Modbus register map [v2.50]................................................... 8-15
Table A–1. Analyzer specifications.............................................................. A-1

Table A–2. Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer .................................. A-7
Table B–1. Potential instrument problems and solutions .............................. B-11
Table C–1. Common reference conditions.................................................... C-2

Table C–2. Gas composition [14] ............................................................... C-5
Table C–3. Coefficients for Eq. (15) [14] ..................................................... C-6
Operator’s Manual ix
Table C–4. Binary interaction parameters [14] ............................................. C-7

Table C–5. Experimental gas compositions [14] ......................................... C-10
Table C–6. Range of composition applicable to ISO method [10] .................. C-14
x 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

1 - INTRODUCTION
SpectraSensors’ 2-Pack analyzer system products are high-speed, diode-laser
based extractive analyzers designed for extremely reliable monitoring of very
low (trace) to standard concentrations of specific components in various
background gases. In order to ensure that the analyzer performs as specified,
it is important to closely review the installation and operation sections of this
manual. This manual contains a comprehensive overview of the 2-Pack
analyzer system and step-by-step instructions on:
• Inspecting the analyzer and sample conditioning system (SCS)
• Installing the analyzer and SCS
• Powering up the analyzer
• Operating the analyzer
• Serial port communications
• Powering down the analyzer
• Troubleshooting the system
Who Should Read This Manual

This manual should be read and referenced by anyone installing, operating or
maintaining the analyzer.
How to Use This Manual

Take a moment to familiarize yourself with this Operator’s Manual by reading
the Table of Contents.
There are a number of options and accessories available for the 2-Pack
analyzer system. This manual has been written to address the most common
options and accessories. Images, tables and charts have been included to
provide a visual understanding of the analyzers and its functions. Special
symbols are also used to provide the user with key information regarding the
system configuration and/or operation. Pay close attention to this information.
General Warnings and Cautions

Instructional icons are provided in this manual and on the 2-Pack analyzer
system to alert the user of potential hazards, important information and
valuable tips. Following are the symbols and associated warning and caution
types to observe when servicing the analyzer. Some of these symbols are
provided for instructional purposes only and are not labeled on the system.
General notes and important information concerning the

installation and operation of the analyzer.
Operator’s Manual 1–1

Warning statement for hazardous voltage. Contact may cause

electric shock or burn. Turn off and lock out system before
servicing.
Failure to follow all directions or substitution of components may

result in explosion.
Failure to follow all directions may result in fire.
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION - Avoid exposure to beam.

Class 3b Radiation Product. Refer servicing to the manufacturer-
qualified personnel.
Failure to follow all directions may result in damage or

malfunction of the analyzer.
! Maximum voltage and current specifications for the fuse closest

to label.
V A
Conventions Used in this Manual

In addition to the symbols and instructional information, this manual is created
with “hot links” to enable the user to quickly navigate between different
sections within the manual. These links include table, figure and section
references and are identified by a pointing finger cursor when rolling over
the text. Simply click on the link to navigate to the associated reference.
SpectraSensors Overview
SpectraSensors, Inc. (SSI) is a leading manufacturer of technologically
advanced electro-optic gas analyzers for the industrial process, gas distribution
and environmental monitoring markets. Headquartered in Houston, Texas, SSI
was incorporated in 1999 as a spin-off of the NASA/Caltech Jet Propulsion
Laboratory (JPL) for the purpose of commercializing space-proven
measurement technologies initially developed at JPL.
1–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Introduction
About the Gas Analyzers

The 2-Pack analyzer system includes tunable diode laser (TDL) absorption
spectrometers operating in the near- to short-wavelength infrared. Each
compact sensor consists of a TDL light source, sample cell and detector
specifically configured to enable high sensitivity measurement of a particular
component within the presences of other gas phase constituents in the stream.
The sensor is controlled by microprocessor-based electronics with embedded
software that incorporates advanced operational and data processing
algorithms.
A sample conditioning system (SCS) is included with the system, which has
been specifically designed to deliver an optimum sample stream representative
of the process systems stream at the time of sampling. Most 2-Pack analyzer
systems are configured for use at extractive natural gas sampling stations.
How the Analyzers Work

The 2-Pack analyzer system employs tunable diode laser absorption spectro-
scopy (TDLAS) to detect the presence of trace substances in process gases.
Absorption spectroscopy is a widely used technique for sensitive trace species
detection. Because the measurement is made in the volume of the gas, the
response is much faster, more accurate and significantly more reliable than
traditional surface-based sensors that are subject to surface contamination.
In its simplest form, a diode laser absorption spectrometer typically consists of
a sample cell with a mirror at one end, and a mirror or window at the opposite
end through which the laser beam can pass. Refer to Figure 1–1. The laser
beam enters the cell and reflects off the mirror(s) making one or more trips
through the sample gas and eventually exiting the cell where the remaining
beam intensity is measured by a detector. With the 2-Pack analyzer system,
sample gas flows continuously through the sample cell ensuring that the
sample is always representative of the flow in the main pipe.

Figure 1–1 Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption

spectrometer
Due to their inherent structure, the molecules in the sample gas each have
characteristic natural frequencies (or resonances). When the output of the
laser is tuned to one of those natural frequencies, the molecules with that
particular resonance will absorb energy from the incident beam. That is, as the
beam of incident intensity, I0(λ), passes through the sample, attenuation occurs
via absorption by the trace gas with absorption cross section σ(λ). According
to the Beer-Lambert absorption law, the intensity remaining, I(λ), as measured
by the detector at the end of the beam path of length / (cell length x number
of passes), is given by
I ( λ ) = I 0 ( λ )exp [ – σ ( λ )lN ] , (1)
where N represents the species concentration. Thus, the ratio of the absorption
measured when the laser is tuned on-resonance versus off-resonance is
directly proportional to the number of molecules of that particular species in
the beam path, or
–1 I ( λ )-
N = -------------- ln ------------ . (2)
σ ( λ )l I0 ( λ )
Figure 1–2 shows the typical raw data from a laser absorption spectrometer
scan including the incident laser intensity, I0(λ), and the transmitted intensity,
I(λ), for a clean system and one with contaminated mirrors (shown to illustrate
the system’s relative intensity to mirror contamination). The positive slope of
raw data results from ramping the current to tune the laser, which not only
increases the wavelength with current, but also causes the corresponding
1–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Introduction
output power to increase. By normalizing the signal by the incident intensity,

any laser output fluctuations are cancelled, and a typical, yet more
pronounced, absorption profile results. Refer to Figure 1–3.
Figure 1–2 Typical raw signal from a laser diode

absorption spectrometer with and without mirror
contamination
Figure 1–3 Typical normalized absorption signal from a

laser diode absorption spectrometer

Note that contamination of the mirrors results solely in lower overall signal.
However, by tuning the laser off-resonance as well as on-resonance and
normalizing the data, the technique self calibrates every scan resulting in
measurements that are unaffected by mirror contamination.
Wavelength Modulation Spectroscopy (WMS) Signal Detection

SpectraSensors takes the fundamental absorption spectroscopy concept a step
further by using a sophisticated signal detection technique called wavelength
modulation spectroscopy (WMS). When employing WMS, the laser drive
current is modulated with a kHz sine wave as the laser is rapidly tuned. A lock-
in amplifier is then used to detect the harmonic component of the signal that
is at twice the modulation frequency (2f), as shown in Figure 1–4. This phase-
sensitive detection enables the filtering of low-frequency noise caused by
turbulence in the sample gas, temperature and/or pressure fluctuations, low-
frequency noise in the laser beam or thermal noise in the detector.
Figure 1–4 Typical normalized 2f signal where the

species concentration is proportional to the peak height
With the resulting low-noise signal and use of fast post-processing algorithms,
reliable parts per million (ppm) or parts per billion (ppb) detection levels are
possible (depending on target and background species) at real-time response
rates (on the order of 1 second).
All SpectraSensors TDL gas analyzers employ the same design and hardware
platform. Measuring different trace gases in various mixed hydrocarbon
background streams is accomplished by selecting a different optimum diode
laser wavelength between 700-3000nm, which provides the least amount of
sensitivity to background stream variations.
1–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

2 - INSTALLATION
This section describes the processes used to initially install and configure your
2-Pack analyzer system. Once the analyzer arrives, you should take a few
minutes to examine the contents before installing the unit.
What Should be Included in the Shipping Box

The contents of the crates should include:
• The SpectraSensors 2-Pack analyzer system
• CDs; Operator’s Manual and other operational instructions as
necessary
• Two external serial cables
• Additional accessories or options as ordered.
If any of these contents are missing, contact your sales representative.
Inspecting the Analyzer and SCS

Unpack and place the unit on a flat surface. Carefully inspect all enclosures for
dents, dings, or general damage. Inspect the supply and return connections for
damage, such as bent tubing. Report any damage to the carrier.
Avoid jolting the instrument by dropping it or banging it against a

hard surface which may disturb the optical alignment.
Each analyzer is custom configured with various accessories and options. If

there is any discrepancy with the order, please contact your sales
representative.
Getting Familiar with the Analyzer

Figure 2–1 shows the general configuration of a 2-Pack analyzer system. On
the front panel of the top enclosures, the keypad and LCD display serve as the
user interface to the analyzer. The top enclosures contain the electronics for
the H2S and H2O analyzers. The H2S electronics (top left enclosure) control the
H2S cell in the sample conditioning system (SCS) below. Refer to “About the
SCS” on page 3-1 for a detailed discussion of this portion of the analyzer. The
H2O electronics control the moisture cell.
Power is supplied to the analyzer via the exterior side panel of each analyzer
electronics enclosure. The lower inlet provides for power to the system and the
upper inlet is used for signal wiring connection. Refer to Figure 2–1.

2–2

4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13
Figure 2–1 General system hardware outline *
* Refer to your system’s drawings for specific configuration.

Installation
A set of solenoid switching valves in the SCS (bottom enclosure) route the flow
either directly (wet cycle) to the analyzer, or through a scrubber (dry cycle) and
on to the analyzer.
Throughout this manual, instructions will refer to the installation, operation and
maintenance of each analyzer as well as the SCS. Although these are unique
and distinct units, they operate in unison and the combination comprise the
SS2100 2-Pack analyzer system.
Analyzer electronics assembly

The analyzer electronics assemblies are shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3
for the H2S analyzer, and Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5 for the H2O analyzer. The
analyzer power supply provides power to the analyzer control electronics. The
analyzer control electronics drive the laser, collect the signal and analyze the
spectra.
See Figure 2–2, Figure 2–3 [H2S] or Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5
! [H2O] for locating fuses. If you need to replace a fuse, use only
the same type and rating of fuse as the original as listed in
Table 2–1 and Table 2–2.
V A
Table 2–1 H2S analyzer fuse specifications
Figure DWG Ref. Voltage Description Rating
120 VAC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/0.8A

Figure 2–2 F1, F2
Figure 2–3 F3 24 VDC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/1.6A
Table 2–2 H2O analyzer fuse specifications
DWG Ref. Voltage Description Rating

Figure 2–4 F1, F2
Figure 2–5 F3 24 VDC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/1.6A

RELAY DRIVER &

SIGNALS 4-20 mA CONTROL
BOARD STACK
TB2
FUSES
(F1,F2)
NO TB3
COMMON
NC GENERAL FAULT ASSIGNABLE

ALARM ALARM
Figure 2–2 H2S analyzer electronics control board

(AC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays
2–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
RELAY DRIVER &

4-20 mA CONTROL
SIGNALS BOARD STACK
TB2
FUSE
(F3)
NO TB3
COMMON
NC GENERAL FAULT ASSIGNABLE

ALARM ALARM
Figure 2–3 H2S analyzer electronics control board

(DC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays

GENERAL FAULT
ALARM
ASSIGNABLE
SIGNALS ALARM
NC
COMMON
NO
TB2
J3
FUSES
(F1,F2)
J4
J10
4-20 mA BOARD
Figure 2–4 H2O analyzer electronics control board

(AC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays
2–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
GENERAL FAULT
ALARM
ASSIGNABLE
SIGNALS ALARM
NC
COMMON
NO
TB2
FUSE
(F3)
4-20 mA BOARD
Figure 2–5 H2O analyzer electronics control board

(DC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays

Hardware and Tools for Installation

Depending on the particular configuration of accessories and options ordered,
you may need the following hardware and tools to complete the installation
process.
Hardware
• Membrane separator filter (if not included)
• Pressure regulator (if not included)
• 3/8” Unistrut® (or equivalent) bolts and spring nuts
• Stainless steel tubing (SpectraSensors recommends using 1/4” O.D.
x 0.035” wall thickness, seamless stainless steel tubing)
• 3/4” conduit hubs
• 3/4” conduit
• Source of plant nitrogen gas (4 SCFH) for purge unit(s), if applicable
• 3/8” x 1 1/2” machine screws and nuts
Tools
• Hand drill and bits
• Tape measure
• Level
• Pencil
• 9/16” socket wrench
• Screw driver
• 9/16” open-end wrench
Mounting the Analyzer

The 2-Pack analyzer system is manufactured for wall or Unistrut (or equivalent)
metal framing installations. Depending on your application and configuration,
the analyzer will typically come mounted on a Unistrut frame. Refer to Figure
A–1 on page A–3 for mounting dimensions.
When mounting the analyzer, be sure not to position the

instrument so that it is difficult to operate adjacent devices. Allow
three feet (1 m) of room in front of the analyzer and any switches.
2–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
It is critical to mount the analyzer so that the supply and return

lines reach the supply and return connections on the chassis while
still maintaining flexibility so that the sample lines are not under
excessive stress.
To mount the analyzer:

1. Select a suitable location to mount the analyzer. Choose a shaded
area or use an optional analyzer hood (or equivalent) to minimize
sun exposure.
SpectraSensors analyzers are designed for operation within the

specified ambient temperature range. Intense sun exposure in
some areas may cause the analyzer temperature to exceed the
maximum.
2. Locate the mounting holes on your unit.

3. For wall installations, mark the centers of the top mounting holes.
Mounting dimensions are shown in Figure A–1 on page A–3.
4. Drill the appropriate size holes for the screws you are using.
5. Hold the analyzer in place and fasten with the top screws.
6. Repeat for the bottom mounting holes.
Once all four screws are tightened the analyzer should be very secure and
ready for the electrical connections.
Connecting Electrical Power to the Analyzer

Depending on your configuration, your analyzer will be set up for 120/240 VAC
@ 50/60 Hz single phase input or optionally 18–24 VDC input. Check the
manufacturing data label or the terminal block labels to determine the power
input requirements. All work should be performed by personnel qualified in
electrical conduit installation. Conduit seals should be used where appropriate
in compliance with local regulations.
Hazardous voltage and risk of electric shock. Turn off and

lock out system power before opening the electronics enclosure
and making any connections.
Careful consideration should be taken when grounding. Properly

ground the unit by connecting ground leads to the grounding
studs provided throughout the system that are labeled with the
ground symbol .

Depending on your configuration, the electrical wiring can typically be

connected to the analyzer through the conduit hub(s) located at the bottom
right or left of the electronics enclosure(s).
Units with an enclosure heater will have an additional power connection
through a conduit hub located at the bottom right of the heated enclosure (see
“Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure Heater” on page 2-12).
To connect electrical power to the analyzer:

1. Open the analyzer electronics enclosure door. Take care not to
disturb the electrical assembly inside.
Failure to properly ground the analyzer may create a high-voltage

shock hazard.
2. Run conduit from the power distribution panel to the conduit hub on
the analyzer electronics enclosure labeled for power input.
Conduit seals should be used where appropriate in compliance

with local regulations.
Because the breaker in the power distribution panel or switch will

be the primary means of disconnecting the power from the
analyzer, the power distribution panel should be located in close
proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator,
or within 10 feet of the analyzer.
An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps should be

used and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the
analyzer.
3. For AC systems, pull ground, neutral and hot wires into the
electronics enclosure.
For DC systems, pull ground, plus and minus wires.

4. Strip back the jacket and/or insulation of the wires just enough to
connect to the power terminal block.
5. For single phase power connections, attach the neutral and hot wires
to the power terminal block by connecting the neutral wire to the
terminal marked “NEU” and the hot wire to the terminal marked
“LINE,” as shown in Figure 2–6.
2–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
LINE
NEU
Figure 2–6 AC single phase (120 VAC) connection

terminal block in analyzer electronics enclosure
For AC split phase systems, attach the two hot legs to the terminal
block by connecting one of the hot wires to the terminal marked
“LINE 1" and the other hot wire to the terminal marked “LINE 2,” as
shown in Figure 2–7.
LINE 2
LINE 1
Figure 2–7 AC split phase (240 VAC) connection

terminal block in electronics enclosure

For DC systems, connect the minus wire to the terminal marked “-,”
and the positive wire to the terminal marked “+,” as shown in Figure
2–8.
Figure 2–8 DC connection (24 VDC) terminal block

in analyzer electronics enclosure
6. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal marked .

7. Close and tighten the analyzer electronics enclosure door.
Field Interface Loads (Solenoid Valves)

The SS2100 must be connected to a certified solenoid having a temperature
code of T4, T5, or T6 at a maximum ambient temperature of +60°F.
Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure

Heater
Units with an enclosure heater will have an additional power connection
through a conduit hub located at the bottom right of the enclosure.
2–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
To connect electrical power to the enclosure heater:

1. Open the heated enclosure door. Take care not to disturb anything
inside.
Failure to properly ground the analyzer may create a high-voltage

shock hazard.
2. Open the power terminal box inside the heated enclosure, as shown
in Figure 2–9 for 120 VAC or Figure 2–10 for 240 VAC connection.
TERMINAL
4
NEU
TERMINAL
5
LINE
TERMINAL
6
Figure 2–9 AC connection terminal block for 120 VAC

enclosure heater
3. Run conduit from the power distribution panel to the conduit hub on
the lower right side of the heated enclosure labeled for power input.


LINE TERMINAL
NEU TERMINAL
GROUND
TERMINAL
Figure 2–10 AC connection terminal block for 240

VAC enclosure heater
Because the breaker in the power distribution panel or switch will

be the primary means of disconnecting the power from the
analyzer, the power distribution panel or switch should be located
in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the
operator.
An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps should be

used and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the
analyzer.
4. Pull ground, neutral and hot wires (#14 AWG minimum) into the
power terminal box inside the heated enclosure.
5. Strip back the jacket and/or insulation of the wires just enough to
connect to the power terminal block.
6. Attach the neutral and hot wires to the power terminal by connecting
the neutral wire to the terminal marked “N” or “NEU,” the hot wire
to the terminal marked “H” or “LINE,” as shown in Figure 2–9 and
Figure 2–10.
7. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal marked “G” or .
8. Close the power terminal box.
9. Close and latch the heated enclosure door.
2–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms

The 4-20 mA current loop and serial output for each channel are supplied from
mating terminal blocks (TB2) located inside the respective analyzer electronics
enclosures, as shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3 [H2S] or Figure 2–4 and
Figure 2–5 [H2O]. By default, the 4-20 mA current loop outputs are factory set
to source current.
The 4-20 mA current loop output is factory set to source current.

To change the 4-20 mA current loop output from source to sink,
refer to “Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode” on page
2-19.
The Assignable Alarm and General Fault Alarm for each channel (H2S or
H2O) trigger SPDT relays located inside the respective analyzer electronics
enclosures. The relay for the Assignable Alarm for each channel is configured
to be normally de-energized with the dry contact changing state on alarm. The
Assignable Alarm outputs can be wired for OPEN or CLOSED depending on
which terminals are used normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).
The relay for the General Fault Alarm for each channel is configured to be
fail-safe (or normally energized) so the dry contact will open in the event of
power loss or General Fault Alarm. Thus, the cables for each General Fault
Alarm should be wired to the common and NO terminals.
Connections can be made with customer-supplied cables for the current loops
and alarms and factory-supplied cables for the serial connections. Consult the
wiring diagram in Figure A–4 on page A–6.
To connect the H2S analyzer signal and alarm cables:

1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the H2S electronics
enclosure cover. Take care not to disturb the electrical assembly
inside.
2. Run conduit from the signal/alarm receiving station to the conduit
hub in the upper left-hand corner of the H2S analyzer electronics
enclosure labeled for signal input/output.

3. Pull the customer-supplied cables for the current loop and alarms
and the SpectraSensors external serial cable (included in the
shipping box) through the conduit into the H2S analyzer electronics
enclosure.
4. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the current loop and serial
cable just enough to connect to the mating terminal block, shown in

Figure 2–11. The mating terminal block can be pulled up and

removed from its base to make the cable connection process easier.
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 2–11 Mating terminal block (TB2) for

connecting signal cables
5. Connect the 4-20 mA current loop and validation request (if

applicable) signal wires to the appropriate terminals, as indicated in
Table 2–3.
Table 2–3 H2S analyzer input/output signal connections
Terminal Description D-Conn Color

1 Serial RX Pin-3 Black
2 Serial TX Pin-2 Red
3 COM Serial Ground Pin-5 Shield
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 Current Loop +
7 Current Loop -
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
6. Connect the serial cable wires to the appropriate terminals according

to Table 2–3. For reference, Table 2–3 also shows the corresponding
pin numbers for configuring a nine-pin Sub-D connector for
connection to a computer serial port.
2–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
7. Re-insert the mating terminal block into its base and verify that each
connection is secure.
8. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the alarm cables just enough
to connect to the alarm relays, shown in Figure 2–2 or Figure 2–3.
9. Connect the cable for the General Fault Alarm to the common and
NO terminals on the corresponding relays shown in Figure 2–2 or
Figure 2–3.
10. Connect the cable for the Assignable Alarm to the common and NO
or NC terminals (for OPEN or CLOSED, respectively, when activated)
on the corresponding relay shown in Figure 2–2 or Figure 2–3.
11. Close and tighten the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure cover.
12. To complete the connections, connect the other end of the current
loop wires to a current loop receiver, the external serial cable to a
serial port on your computer and the alarm cables to the appropriate
alarm monitors.
To connect the H2O analyzer signal and alarm cables:

1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the electronics
inside.
2. Run conduit from the signal/alarm receiving station to the conduit
hub in the upper right-hand corner of the H2O analyzer electronics
enclosure.

3. Pull the customer-supplied cables for the current loop and alarms
and the SpectraSensors external serial cable (included in the
shipping box) through the conduit into the H2O analyzer electronics
enclosure.
4. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the current loop and serial
cable just enough to connect to the mating terminal block, shown in
Figure 2–11. The mating terminal block can be pulled up and
removed from its base to make the cable connection process easier.
5. Connect the 4-20 mA current loop signal wires to the appropriate
terminals, as indicated in Table 2–4.
6. Connect the serial cable wires to the appropriate terminals according
to Table 2–4. For reference, Table 2–4 also shows the corresponding
pin numbers for configuring a nine-pin Sub-D connector for
connection to a computer serial port.

Table 2–4 H2O analyzer input/output signal connections
Terminal Description D-Conn Color

1 Serial RX Pin-3 Black
2 Serial TX Pin-2 Red
3 COM Serial Ground Pin-5 Shield
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 Current Loop +
7 Current Loop -
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
7. Re-insert the mating terminal block into its base and verify that each
connection is secure.
8. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the alarm cables just enough
to connect to the alarm relays, shown in Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5.
9. Connect the cable for each General Fault Alarm to the common
and NO terminals on the corresponding relays shown in Figure 2–4
or Figure 2–5.
10. Connect the cable for the Assignable Alarm to the common and NO
or NC terminals (for OPEN or CLOSED, respectively, when activated)
on the corresponding relay shown in Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5.
11. Close and tighten the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure door.
12. To complete the connections, connect the other end of the current
loop wires to a current loop receiver, the external serial cable to a
serial port on your computer and the alarm cables to the appropriate
alarm monitors.
2–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode
Changing of the current loop mode may negate specific hazardous

area certifications. Contact your factory service representative for
details.
By default, the 4-20 mA current loop output is factory set to source current. In
some instances it may be necessary to change the 4-20 mA current loop output
in the field from source to sink. The work must be performed by personnel
qualified in electronics assembly.
Hazardous voltage and risk of electric shock. Turn off and

lock out system power before opening the electronics enclosure
and servicing.
To change the H2S analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink:

1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the electronics
inside.
2. Locate the relay control board in the upper right of the electronics
enclosure, as shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3.
3. Unscrew the four mounting screws, shown in Figure 2–12, holding
the relay driver board to four stand-offs.
4. Gently pull the relay driver board to the side to expose the 4-20 mA
board, as shown in Figure 2–12.
5. Disconnect the 10-pin (J1) connector from the 4-20 mA board,
unscrew the four stand-offs and remove the board from the back
panel.
6. Move the jumper (JMP1) connecting the center pin to pin “A,” shown
in Figure 2–13, to connect the center pin with pin “P.”
7. Re-install the board on the panel and connect the 10-pin (J1)
connector.
8. Re-install the relay control board.
9. Reconnect power to the H2S analyzer. Confirm the 4 mA (min.) and
20 mA (max.) points (see “To scale the current loop signal” on
page 4-34).
10. Close and tighten the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure cover.

MOUNTING RELAY CONTROL

SCREW (X4) BOARD
STAND-OFF
SCREW (X4)
4-20 mA BOARD
Figure 2–12 H2S analyzer relay driver and 4-20 mA

board stack
JMP1
ZERO (4 mA)
ADJUST
J1
SPAN (20 mA)

ADJUST
Figure 2–13 4-20 mA board
2–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
To change the H2O analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink:

1. Open the electronics enclosure cover. Take care not to disturb the
electrical assembly inside.
2. Locate the 4-20 mA board in the center of the electronics enclosure,
as shown in Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5.
3. Disconnect the 10-pin (J1) connector from the 4-20 mA board,
unscrew the four stand-offs and remove the board from the back
panel.
4. Move the jumper (JMP1) connecting the center pin to pin “A,” shown
in Figure 2–13, to connect the center pin with pin “P.”
5. Re-install the board on the panel and connect the 10-pin (J1)
connector.
6. Reconnect power to the H2O analyzer. Confirm the 4 mA (min.) and
20 mA (max.) points (see “To scale the current loop signal” on
page 7-20).
7. Close and tighten the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure cover.
Connecting the Gas Lines

Once you have verified that the analyzer is functional and that the analyzer
circuit is de-energized, you are ready to connect the supply and return lines.
All work should be performed by technicians qualified in pneumatic tubing.
Process samples may contain hazardous material in potentially

flammable and/or toxic concentrations. Personnel should have a
thorough knowledge and understanding of the physical properties
and safety precautions for the sample contents before installing
the SCS.
SpectraSensors recommends using 1/4” O.D x 0.035” wall thickness, seamless

stainless steel tubing. Refer to the system layout drawing in Figure A–1 on page
A–3 for supply and return port locations.
To connect the sample supply lines:

1. First confirm that each sample probe is correctly installed at the
process supply tap and that each sample probe isolation valve is
closed.
The process sample at the sample tap may be at a high pressure.

Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation
valve and field sample reducing pressure regulator.

All valves, regulators, switches, etc. should be operated in

accordance with site lock-out/tag-out procedures.
2. Also, confirm that each field pressure reducing station is installed

properly at the sample probe and that the pressure regulator at each
field pressure reducing station is closed (adjustment knob turned
fully counterclockwise).
3. Check that each relief valve vent line is properly installed from the
field pressure reducing station to the low pressure flare or
atmospheric vent connection.
4. Determine appropriate tubing route from the field pressure reducing
station to the SCS.
5. Run stainless steel tubing from each field pressure reducing station
(set for the specified supply pressure, refer to Figure A–3 on page
A–5) to the corresponding sample supply port of the SCS. Bend
tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure
proper seating between the tubing and fittings. Fully ream all tubing
ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen
or air prior to making the connection.
6. Connect each sample supply tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless
steel compression-type fitting provided.
7. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight.
For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to
the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench.
Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.
8. Check all connections for gas leaks. SpectraSensors recommends
using a liquid leak detector.
Do not exceed 10 psig (0.7 barg) in sample cell. Damage to cell

may result.
To connect the sample/bypass returns:

1. Confirm that the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-
off valve is closed.

2. Determine appropriate tubing route from the SCS to the low

pressure flare or atmospheric vent header.
2–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
3. Run stainless steel tubing from the sample return ports to the low
pressure flare or atmospheric vent header connection. Bend tubing
using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure proper
seating between the tubing and fittings. Fully ream all tubing ends.
Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen or air
prior to making the connection.
4. Connect the sample/bypass return tube to the SCS using the 1/4”
stainless steel compression-type fittings provided.
Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.

may result.
7. Be sure to vent any pressure relief vent ports (if applicable) and/or
DBB valve vent ports (if applicable) in a similar fashion when the unit
is in use.
To connect the pneumatic valve source (if applicable):

1. Determine appropriate tubing route from the customer-supplied
instrument air or nitrogen control gas source [50 psig (3.4 barg)
min. to 100 psig (6.9 barg) max] to the SCS.
2. Run stainless steel tubing from the customer-supplied regulator
[50 psig (3.4 barg) min. to 100 psig (6.9 barg) max] to the
pneumatic valve instrument air supply port.
3. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to
ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings.
4. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with
clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.
5. Connect the control gas tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless
steel compression-type union fitting provided.
a. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut

to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a
wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as
required.


Application of Conduit Lubricant

To ensure proper installation, SpectraSensors recommends using STL8 screw
thread lubricant or equivalent on all conduit screw thread and its tapped
opening.
STL8 Screw Thread Lubricant is a lithium based, anti-galling substance with
excellent adhesion that maintains rain-tightness and grounding continuity
between conduit fittings. This lubricant has proven very effective between
parts made of dissimilar metals, and is stable in temperatures from -20° F to
+300° F.
Do not use this lubricant on exposed current-carrying parts.
1. Holding the fitting piece at one end, generously apply the lubricant
on the male threaded surface (at least five threads wide) as shown
below.
2. Screw the female pipe thread onto the male fitting until the
lubricated threads are engaged.
Eyes: May cause minor irritation.
Skin: May cause minor irritation.
Ingestion: Relatively non-toxic. Ingestion may result in a laxative

effect. Ingestion of substantial quantities may cause lithium toxicity.
2–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation
Connecting the Validation Gas (If Applicable)

For systems with validation, an appropriate validation gas source will need to
be connected to the SCS.
To connect the validation source:

1. Determine appropriate tubing route from the customer-supplied
validation gas source to the SCS.
2. Run stainless steel tubing from the validation source (regulated to
the specified pressure) to the validation gas supply port.
3. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to
ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings.
4. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with
clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.

may result.
5. Connect the validation source tube to the SCS using the 1/4”
stainless steel compression-type fittings provided.
a. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut

to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a
wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as
required.

8. Repeat for additional validation gasses (if applicable).
Conditioning the SCS Tubing

Newly installed systems invariably have some trace contaminants and/or are
intended for measuring trace amounts of gas constituents that tend to cling to
system walls resulting erroneous readings if the constituents are not in
equilibrium with the system walls. Therefore, once the analyzer and SCS are
completely connected, the entire system (i.e., from the sample source valve to
the vent or return) should be conditioned by flowing sample gas through the
system for up to 12 hours (or until the reading stabilizes) after the system is
powered up and before actual readings are taken. Progress of the system
conditioning can be monitored via the gas concentration readings. Once the
gas constituents have reached equilibrium with the system walls, the readings
should stabilize.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2–26 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

3 - SAMPLE CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Personnel should have a thorough understanding of the operation
of the H2S & H2O analyzer and the procedures presented here
before operating the sample conditioning system.

A pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to
reduce the sample pressure and allow operation of the sample
conditioning system at a low pressure. Use extreme caution when
operating the sample probe isolation valve and field pressure
reducing regulator.
The Sample Conditioning System (SCS) has been specifically designed to

deliver a sample stream to the analyzer that is representative of the process at
the time of sampling. To ensure the integrity of the sample stream and its
analysis, care must be taken to install and operate the SCS properly. Therefore,
any personnel intending to operate or service the analyzer and SCS should
have a thorough understanding of the process application and the design of the
analyzer and SCS.
Most problems experienced with sample systems tend to result from operating
the system differently than intended. In some cases, the actual process
conditions may be different than originally specified (e.g., flow rates, presence
of contaminants, particulates, or condensables that may only exist under upset
conditions). By establishing understanding of the application and the design of
the system, most issues can be avoided altogether or easily diagnosed and
corrected ensuring successful normal operation.
If there are any remaining questions concerning the design, operation, or
maintenance of the SCS, contact SpectraSensors technical services group.

and safety precautions for the sample contents before operating
the SCS.
About the SCS

SpectraSensors’ Sample Conditioning Systems (SCS) are designed to filter
incoming gas, as well as control pressure and flow to the analyzer. The SCS
uses a 7-micron particulate filter and a membrane separator that removes
entrained liquids or particles from the natural gas stream before they enter the
analyzer. Because SpectraSensors’ analyzers are immune to vapor phase
contaminants found in natural gas, using the particulate filter and membrane
separator prevents any contamination of the analyzer.

The membrane separator is a three-port device. When gas enters the separator
inlet, only the vapors will pass through the membrane to the outlet. The outlet
flow passes through a flow control valve and a flowmeter to the analyzer.
Blocked liquids or particles can be flushed from the separator housing out the
bypass port.
If the correct probe and regulator is used at the sample extraction point, and
the sample transport line is heated to prevent condensation, no liquids or
particles should reach the SCS. Under normal conditions, the membrane
separator will remove very little liquid, if any. The main purpose of the
separator will be to protect the analyzer in the case of an upset condition.
Besides filtering the incoming gas, the SCS is also responsible for controlling
flow and pressure to the analyzer. An instrument grade pressure regulator is
used to set the final pressure of the gas before it enters the analyzer. There is
one flowmeter for the flow path to the analyzer and one flowmeter for the flow
path of the bypass. The flowmeters have a built-in flow controller to set flow
rates to the recommended values (see Table A–1 for proper flow and pressure
settings).
Most analyzers are equipped with a validation port. The validation port is used
to connect a reference gas to verify that the analyzer is working properly. See
“Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40 (H2S) or page 7–21 (H2O).
Typically the SCS is assembled inside of an overall stainless steel enclosure,
which is insulated and heated using a temperature controller. This ensures that
the sample remains in a stable vapor phase and improves the measurement
performance.
In some cases other types of components are included in the SCS, such as
coalescing filters, liquid knock-outs, pumps, special heaters and other special
components that are application dependant. Refer to Figure A–1 on page A–3
for a general overview of the system configuration. For your specific system
configuration, refer to your as-built drawings.
Checking the SCS Installation

The integral SCS is factory set with the appropriate pressures, flow rates, and
enclosure temperature, as indicated in the as-built drawings. However, before
operating the system for the first time, a careful check of the installation of the
entire SCS from the sample probe to the flare/vent is recommended.
To perform SCS installation checks:

1. Confirm that the sample probe is correctly installed at the process
supply tap and that the sample probe isolation valve is closed.
2. Confirm that the field pressure reducing station is installed properly
at the sample probe.
3–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Sample Conditioning System
3. Confirm that the relief valve at the field pressure reducing station
has been set to the specified setpoint. The relief valve is located on
the pressure reducing regulator at the process sample tap.
Although the relief valve has been preset, the setpoint must be
confirmed prior to operation of the sample system. To confirm or
reset the relief valve, it must be removed from the pressure
reducing regulator and connected to an adjustable pressure
source (refer to the manufacturer's instructions for details on
setting the relief valve). After the relief valve is re-installed, all
connections must be leak checked.
4. Confirm that the relief valve vent line is properly installed from the
field pressure reducing station to the low pressure flare or
atmospheric connection.
5. If applicable, confirm that the sample probe and field pressure
reducing station are properly traced and insulated without any
exposed surfaces.
6. If applicable, confirm that the field run electric-traced sample
transport tubing is installed correctly (no exposed tubing or
pockets), terminated properly at each end, and that each line has
been purged clean and pressure tested.
7. Confirm that all valves are closed and all switches are off.
8. Confirm that the AC power is available to the electrically traced
sample tubing (if applicable), analyzer, and SCS but that the local
switches are off.
9. Confirm that the field analog and alarm signal wiring is
interconnected properly (see “To connect the H2S analyzer
signal and alarm cables” on page 2-15 and “To connect the H2O
analyzer signal and alarm cables” on page 2-17).
10. Confirm that the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent is properly
connected, if applicable.
11. Confirm that the analyzer house atmospheric vent is properly
installed, if applicable.
12. Confirm that all sample system tubing has been thoroughly leak
checked.
Starting up the SCS

After the SCS installation has been thoroughly checked, you are ready to begin
preparing for initial SCS startup.
To prepare for SCS startup:

1. Confirm that all AC power switches for the analyzer and SCS are off.

2. If applicable, apply AC power to the electric-traced sample transport

tubing at the tracer control system.
If applicable, personnel should have a thorough understanding of

the operation of the tracer power supply and control system
before operating the SCS.
3. If applicable, confirm that the sample supply line electric tracer

temperature controller at the tracer control system is set to the
temperature specified and that the sample supply line tracer is
heating to the specified temperature.
4. Confirm that the sample probe isolation valve is closed.
5. Confirm that the pressure regulator at the field pressure reducing
station is closed (adjustment knob turned fully counterclockwise).
6. Confirm that all sample system shut-off valves are closed.
7. Confirm that the sample bypass and analyzer flowmeter metering
valves are closed (adjustment knob turned clockwise). Do not over-
tighten the metering valves or damage could occur.
To start up the sample system heater:

1. Turn on AC power to the sample system heater.
2. After sufficient warm-up time (5-8 hours), confirm that the sample
system enclosure is heated to the specified temperature (see
Table A–1 on page A–1 and Figure A–3 on page A–5) by observing
the temperature reading on the door mounted thermometer.
The entire analyzer system is calibrated for operation at the

enclosure temperature specified. Measurements should be
considered valid only when the enclosure is at the specified
temperature.
To start up the field pressure reducing station:

Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation
valve and field pressure reducing regulator.
1. Open the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off

valve for the relief valve vent from the field pressure reducing
station.
3–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

The low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve

must be “car-sealed” open and tagged as a relief valve vent so
that this valve will not be closed unless the SCS is not in
operation.
2. Slowly open the sample probe process shut-off valve at the sample
supply tap.
3. Slowly open the pressure regulator at the field pressure reducing
station (adjustment knob turned clockwise) and set the pressure
regulator to the specified pressure.
To start up the sample bypass stream on process sample:

valve for the bypass flow effluent from the SCS.
2. Open the sample supply port shut-off valve.
3. Open the bypass flowmeter metering valve to establish sample flow
from the sample probe and set the metering valve to the specified
value.
4. Confirm that the sample supply pressure under flowing conditions is
approximately set to the specified pressure.
Although the exact supply pressure setpoint is not critical, the

pressure at the sample system should be within 5 psig of the
specified supply pressure setpoint. There may be a difference
between the pressure readings at the sample tap and inside the
SCS due to the pressure drop in the sample transport line under
flowing conditions. If the pressure at the SCS under flowing
conditions is not sufficiently close to the specified setpoint, it will
be necessary to readjust the pressure regulator setpoint at the
field pressure reducing station to provide the required supply
pressure with the specified sample bypass flow.
To start up the analyzer on process sample:

valve for the sample flow effluent from the SCS.
2. Open the sample flowmeter metering valves to approximately the
specified flow for each measurement cell.
3. If required, adjust each sample pressure regulator to the specified
setpoint for each measurement cell.

4. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valves to the specified flows

for the measurement cells.
The adjustment setpoints of the analyzer flowmeters and

pressure regulators will be interactive and may require
readjustment multiple times until the final setpoints are obtained.
The analyzer system has been designed for the sample flow rate
specified. A lower than specified sample flow rate may adversely
affect analyzer performance. If you are unable to attain the
specified sample flow rate, contact your factory sales
representative.
5. Confirm the sample flow and pressure setpoints and readjust the
metering valves and pressure regulator at the field pressure
reducing station to the specified setpoints, if necessary.
6. Confirm the sample bypass flow and readjust the bypass metering
valve to the specified setpoint, if necessary. The SCS is now
operating with the process sample.
7. Power up the analyzers according to the procedure given for the H2S
analyzer in “To power up the analyzer” on page 4-1 or for the
H2O analyzer in “To power up the analyzer” on page 7-1).
Shutting Down the SCS

the SCS.
The process sample at the sample tap is at a high pressure. A

pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to reduce
the sample pressure and enable operation of the SCS at a low
pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe
isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.

3–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown:

The analyzer can be isolated from the primary sample bypass section for short-
term shutdown or maintenance of the analyzer while allowing the sample
bypass flow to continue in a steady-state mode.
Due to the high pressure of the process sample, it is advisable to

allow the sample bypass flow to continue during short-term
isolation of the analyzer. Continuing sample bypass flow allows
the field pressure regulator to continue normal operation without
possible overpressure and activation of the relief valve in the
event the pressure regulator leaks when the downstream flow is
discontinued.
1. Close the sample flowmeter metering valve (adjustment knob

turned clockwise) for each measurement channel. Do not over-
tighten the metering valves or damage could occur.
2. Allow any residual gas to flow out of the measurement cells.
3. Close the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off
valve for the effluent from each measurement cell.
If the system will not be out of service for an extended period, it

is advised that power remain applied to the sample transport line
electric tracer, if applicable, and the sample system enclosure
heater.
To isolate the SCS for short-term shutdown:

The SCS can be isolated from the process sample tap for short-term shutdown
or maintenance of the SCS without requiring the shutdown of the field pressure
reducing station.

the SCS.

Although the pressure reducing regulator at the process sample

tap is designed for “bubble-tight” shut off, this condition may not
occur after the system has been in operation for an extended
period. Isolation of the SCS from the field pressure regulator will
discontinue sample flow and may cause the pressure at the outlet
of the field pressure regulator to slowly increase if “bubble-tight”
shut off of the pressure regulator does not occur. The slow
pressure increase will continue until the pressure setpoint of the
relief valve is reached and the excess pressure is vented by the
relief valve. Although this situation is not intended, it does not
cause a significant problem if the SCS is only isolated for a short
period. Only a small amount of process sample will be vented
when the relief valve opens because the pressure regulator will
continue to act as a flow restriction.
1. Isolate the analyzer from the bypass following the procedure under
“To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term
shutdown” on page 3-7.
2. Close the sample supply shut-off valve to the SCS.
3. Allow the sample bypass to flow until all residual gas has dissipated
from the lines as indicated by no flow on the sample bypass
flowmeter.
4. If applicable, connect a nitrogen purge line to the nitrogen purge
port making sure not to exceed the maximum sample supply
pressure specification shown on the schematic in the as-built
drawings. Make sure there is a check valve in the line to prevent
sample gas from contaminating the purge system. Open the
nitrogen purge port valve and purge the system with nitrogen for 10
minutes then turn off the nitrogen purge port valve.
valve for the effluent from the sample bypass.
6. Turn off power to the analyzer.
If the system will not be out of service for an extended period, it

is advised that power remain applied to the sample transport line
electric tracer, if applicable, and the sample system enclosure
heater.
To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown:

If the SCS is to be out of service for an extended period, the SCS must be
isolated at the process sample tap.
3–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


A pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to
reduce the sample pressure and allow operation of the SCS at a
low pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample
probe isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.
The sample transport line must be vented to the low pressure

flare or atmospheric vent header through the bypass flowmeter to
avoid pressure surges. The procedure given in the following steps
can be followed regardless of whether or not the SCS has been
isolated from the process tap as described in the previous section.

1. Isolate the analyzer from the bypass following the procedure under
“To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term
2. Confirm flow in the sample bypass flowmeter (the actual flow is not
critical).
3. Close the sample probe process shut-off valve at the sample supply
process tap.
4. Allow pressure in the field pressure reducing regulator to dissipate
until only a low residual pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge
at the field station.
valve for the relief valve vent from the field pressure regulator.
6. Close the field pressure reducing regulator (adjustment knob turned
fully counterclockwise).
7. Close the sample supply shut-off valve to the SCS.
8. Close the sample bypass flowmeter metering valve (adjustment
knob turned clockwise). Do not over-tighten the metering valve or
damage could occur.
valve for the effluent from the sample bypass.
10. Turn off power to the analyzer.

11. Turn off the AC power to the SCS heater and the sample tracer, if
applicable, at the power distribution panel.
Although power could be shut off to the sample supply electric

tracer, it is advisable to allow this line to remain heated unless the
SCS is to be out of service for an extended period or maintenance
is required on the line.
Periodic SCS Maintenance
Due to the chemical properties of the process samples, care must

be taken to repair or replace components with proper materials of
construction. Maintenance personnel should have a thorough
knowledge and understanding of the chemical characteristics of
the process before performing maintenance on the SCS.
The status of the SCS should be checked regularly to confirm proper operation
(pressures, flows, etc.) and detect potential problems or failures before
damage occurs. If maintenance is required, isolate the part of the system to be
serviced by following the appropriate procedure under “Shutting Down the
SCS” on page 3-6.
All filter elements should be checked periodically for loading. Obstruction of a
filter element can be observed by a decreasing supply pressure or bypass flow.
If loading of a filter is observed, the filter should be cleaned and the filter
element replaced. After observation for some time, a regular schedule can be
determined for replacement of filter elements.
No other regularly scheduled maintenance should be required for the system.
Preventive and Demand SCS Maintenance

Preventive and demand maintenance will be required when components and

parts deteriorate or fail as a result of continuous use. The performance of the
entire SCS and individual components should be monitored regularly so that
maintenance may be performed on a scheduled basis in order to prevent a
failure that could take the system out of operation.
The SCS is designed for convenient removal and replacement of component
parts. Complete spare components should always be available. In general, if a
problem or failure occurs, the complete part should be removed and replaced
3–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

to limit system down time. Some components may be repaired (replacement

of seats and seals, etc.) and then reused.
Under a process upset condition, it is possible for liquid to enter the sample
probe and sample transport tubing. Normally, this liquid should purge from the
sample transport line and be trapped in a coalescing filter upstream of the
analyzer.
If the sample supply line does not appear to completely clear during normal
operation, it may be necessary to clean the sample transport line to remove
any liquid that may adhere to the wall of the tubing. The sample transport line
must be disconnected at both ends to allow cleaning. After cleaning, the line
should be purged dry with air or nitrogen before the system is placed back in
operation.
The system must be taken out of service during any cleaning of

the sample transport line.
If liquid makes it into the analyzer SCS, a filter element may become
obstructed leading to a decreasing supply pressure or bypass flow. If
obstruction of a filter is observed, the filter should be cleaned and the filter
element replaced.
Servicing the H2S Scrubber

The H2S scrubber contains material that gradually loses its scrubbing ability
with use. The lifetime of the material depends on how much H2S flows through
the scrubber (gas composition) and how often (switching frequency). Thus,
scrubber lifetime is very application specific.
The SpectraSensors 2-Pack analyzer system predicts the remaining scrubber
capacity by using the actual H2S concentration measurements and dry cycle
durations to calculate how much cumulative H2S has been removed by the
scrubber. Scrubber lifetimes have been simulated for typical natural gas and
fuel gas applications. As shown in Figure 3–1, under normal operating
conditions, a 2” scrubber in a natural gas application with an average H2S
concentration of 4 ppmv will last for many years, whereas a 3” scrubber in a
fuel gas application with an average H2S concentration of 100 ppmv would be
expected to last on the order of 190 days.

100
80
REMAINING CAPACITY (%)
60
40
4 ppmv, 2” Scrubber
20 100 ppmv, 3” Scrubber
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
DAYS
Figure 3–1 Predicted scrubber lifetime based on

average H2S load
As an added precaution, a scrubber efficiency indicator, shown in Figure 3–2,

is mounted at the outlet of the scrubber. The powder material in the scrubber
efficiency indicator changes color from turquoise to dark grey if there is any
H2S breakthrough, as shown in Figure 3–3. Alternatively, regular validation of
the system with an appropriate gas standard will indicate when the scrubber
needs to be replaced.
When specifying gas standards, indicate H2S in methane balance.

For a measured range of 0-20 ppm, a concentration of 4-16 ppm
is recommended.
The system will activate a New Scrubber Alarm fault, which triggers the
General Fault Alarm to indicate when it is time to replace the scrubber and
scrubber efficiency indicator. Once the scrubber and scrubber efficiency
indicator have been replaced, reset the scrubber lifetime monitor with the New
Scrub Installed parameter and the General Fault Alarm with the Reset
option for the General Alarm DO parameter (see “To change parameters in
Mode 2” on page 4-13).
3–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

SCRUBBER
FLOW
SCRUBBER
EFFICIENCY
INDICATOR
Figure 3–2 Scrubber and scrubber efficiency

indicator
If scrubber replacement is necessary, follow the procedure below. Replacement

scrubbers, scrubber efficiency indicators, and other replacement parts can be
ordered by the part numbers listed in “Spare Parts” on page A-7.

To replace the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator:

1. Close the sample supply shut-off valve.
2. Allow all residual gas to dissipate as indicated by no flow on the
sample bypass flowmeter.
3. Unscrew the compression nuts on the inlet end of the scrubber and
scrubber efficiency indicator assembly.
4. To install the new scrubber and indicator, insert the inlet and outlet
tubes into the compression fittings of a new scrubber and scrubber
efficiency indicator assembly, ensuring each are oriented correctly,
according to the flow pattern shown in Figure 3–2.

Before breakthrough After breakthrough
Figure 3–3 H2S scrubber/dryer efficiency indicator

before and after breakthrough
6. Reset the scrubber lifetime monitor with the New Scrub Installed
parameter and the General Fault Alarm with the Reset option for
the General Alarm DO parameter (see “To change parameters in
Mode 2” on page 4-13).
7. Restart the SCS.
9. Re-validate the system with an appropriate gas standard following
the instructions under “Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40.
10. Purge the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator assembly with
nitrogen to remove all flammable gas and cap the inlet and outlet.
H2S scrubbers and scrubber indicators contain Copper (II) Oxide

[CAS# 1317-38-0] and basic cupric carbonate [CAS# 12069-69-
1], which are harmful if swallowed and toxic to aquatic organisms.
Handle with care and avoid contact with the internal substances.
3–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Disposal of Used Scrubbers
Depleted H2S scrubbers and scrubber indicators contain

predominantly Copper (II) Sulfide [CAS# 1317-40-4] with some
remaining Copper (II) Oxide [CAS# 1317-38-0] and basic cupric
carbonate [CAS# 12069-69-1], which are odorless dark powders.
The scrubber and scrubber indicator require few special
precautions other than avoiding contact with the internal
substances, keeping the scrubber tightly sealed and protecting
the contents against humidity.
1. Discard used scrubber and scrubber indicator in appropriate

receptacle.

3–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

4 - OPERATING THE H2S ANALYZER
The analyzer is designed to be a stationary measuring device. It

should be securely mounted during normal operation.
The laser housing labels on the flanges of the sample cell warn
about exposure to laser radiation inside. Never open the sample
cell unless directed to do so by a service representative and the
analyzer power is turned off.
The optical head has a seal and “WARNING” sticker to prevent

inadvertent tampering with the device. Do not attempt to
compromise the seal of the optical head assembly. Doing so will
result in loss of device sensitivity and inaccurate measurement
data. Repairs can then only be performed by the factory and are
not covered under warranty.
Firmware Version
Each 2-Pack analyzer system operates with its own version of firmware. The
firmware version for each analyzer is listed in the system calibration report or
on the LCD during system start-up. This chapter for system operation assumes
the use of version FS 5.13 firmware.
Powering Up the Analyzer

After mounting the analyzer, connecting the power wires, connecting the gas
lines, connecting the (optional) output signal wires and checking for leaks, you
are ready to power up the analyzer.
Refer to the figures for the analyzer electronic control boards in

Figure 2–2 on page 2–4 or Figure 2–3 on page 2–5 for locating
fuses. If you need to replace a fuse, use only the same type and
rating of fuse as the original as listed in the analyzer fuse
specifications table in Table 2–1 or Table 2–2.
To power up the analyzer:

1. Power up the analyzer by energizing the circuit to the analyzer.
2. For systems with a heated enclosure, confirm that the sample
system enclosure is heated to approximately the specified
temperature by observing the temperature reading on the by
observing the temperature reading on the door mounted
thermometer.

For systems with heated enclosures, a Temperature too Low or

Temperature too High fault will activate the General Fault
Alarm when the enclosure temperature is more than 5 °C above
or below the specified temperature. Once the enclosure has
reached the specified temperature, reset the General Fault
Alarm (see Table 4–1).
3. The system goes through an initialization period while showing the

firmware version on the bottom line until the LCD displays the
Normal Mode screen.
4. Enable Peak Tracking following the procedure outlined in
“Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page
4-9.
5. Three to four minutes are required for the analyzer to establish
reference spectra before displaying a reading.
6. After initialization and establishment of reference spectra, the LCD
displays four lines, the third of which is blank.
<NORMAL MODE>
H2S: 1.0256ppmv
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F
The measurements displayed are:
• H2S: Refers to the analyte concentration in the

sample cell (in units) selected in Mode 2.
• P: Pressure in the sample cell in units selected in

Mode 2.
7. Continuous updates of the measurement parameters displaying on

the LCD indicate that the analyzer is operating normally.
Definitions for the acronyms displayed on the LCD are given in the
section “Modes Defined” on page 4-4.
Powering Down the Analyzer

It may be necessary to power down the analyzer for problem solving or
maintenance reasons. An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps
4–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Operating the H2S Analyzer
should have been installed and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for
the analyzer.
To power down the analyzer:

1. Switch off the power to the analyzer using the switch or circuit
breaker designated as the disconnection device for the equipment.
2. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a short period of time for
routine maintenance, isolate the analyzer from the sample
conditioning system (SCS) by following the procedure under “To
isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term
3. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a long period of time,
follow the procedure under “To isolate the process sample tap
for long-term shutdown” on page 3-8 or contact SpectraSensors’
Technical Support Group. It is recommended to also disconnect the
power completely from the analyzer to prevent potential damage
from lightning strikes.
Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad

The keypad enables the operator to modify measurement units, adjust
operational parameters, and perform diagnostics. During normal operation, the
LCD continuously displays the measured component’s concentration, sample
cell temperature, and sample cell pressure.
The SpectraSensors keypad is shown in Figure 4–1. To activate any functions
on the keypad, press the mode key # followed by a number on the keypad to
specify a mode.
You must press the # key before pressing a number or function

key to trigger a response from the keypad.
When you press the # key, the word MODE displays on the LCD. If the keypad
watchdog is enabled, a countdown timer will begin when MODE displays. If the
countdown expires and no buttons have been pressed, the analyzer will
automatically revert to Mode 1.
The * key functions as the “enter” key. Always press * after entering a value
using the keypad (unless the entry was made in error). Pressing the * key
stores the displayed parameter value and cycles the LCD to the next parameter.
If you do make an error, press the * key followed by the TEST key, and then
the * key to return to the parameter and enter the correct value.

LCD DISPLAY
“ENTER” KEY EXPONENT VALUE
MODE KEY # * E TEST SCROLL DIRECTION
NORMAL DISPLAY 1 2 3 SCRUBBER LIFE DATA
DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS 4 5 6 EXPORT DIAGNOSTIC DATA
ACTIVATE VALIDATION 1 7 8 9 VALIDATION RESULTS
_ 0 .
CHANGE PARAMETERS ACTIVATE VALIDATION 2
4-20 mA TEST
Figure 4–1 H2S keypad (FS 5.13 Firmware)
Modes Defined
Use the keypad to access the following modes by pressing the # key first
followed by a number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9) to activate a mode. The
following section explains each mode and the corresponding information that
displays on the LCD.
Whenever you press the # key to enter a mode other than

Mode 1, the analyzer suspends measurement until you return to
Mode 1.
Every time another mode is accessed regardless of whether a

parameter has been changed, the analyzer requires three to four
minutes time upon returning to Mode 1 to re-establish reference
spectra before displaying a reading.
4–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Mode 1: (Normal Mode)

Mode 1 continuously displays updated measurements. Press the # key
followed by the 1 key.
# + 1
<NORMAL MODE>
H2S: 1.0256ppmv
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

• H2S: Refers to the concentration in the sample cell (in units) of the
analyte/component selected in Mode 2.
• P: Pressure in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.
• T: Temperature in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.
Mode 2: (Set Parameter Mode)

Mode 2 enables user to view and change measurement parameters. Follow the
procedure under “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on
page 4-9 for viewing and changing any of the parameters.
Mode 3: (Scrubber Life Data)

Displays the predicted remaining scrubber/dryer capacity of the days
remaining of service. Press the # key followed by the 3 key.
# + 3
<SCRUBBER LIFE MODE>

Scrubber Life Data:
Life left: 98.3%
Days left: 531
The New Scrubber Alarm fault will activate the General Alarm Fault when
the scrubber/dryer capacity is predicted to be 5% or less, or when the value
for days left reaches 0. Refer to “Servicing the H2S Scrubber” on page 3-11
for information.

Mode 4: (System Diagnostic Parameters)

Mode 4 displays system diagnostic data. These values may be useful when
troubleshooting the system. Press the # key followed by the 4 key.
# + 4
T D: 50.7 W: 50.6 C
P D: 954 W: 1103mb
DCD: 2674 W: 2672
Fit: 0.98 Mid:60.24
Whenever you press the # key to enter a mode other than

Mode 1, the analyzer suspends measurement until you return to
Mode 1.
The diagnostic parameters displayed are:

• DryTemp (T D): Shows the temperature in the measurement cell
when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it.
• WetTemp (W): Shows the temperature in the measurement cell
when normal sample gas is flowing through it.
• DryPressure (P D): Shows the pressure in the measurement cell
when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it.
• WetPressure (W): Shows the pressure in the measurement cell
when normal sample gas is flowing through it.
• DryDC (DC D): Shows the magnitude of the DC laser power in the
measurement cell when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it.
Acceptable values are between 800 and 3300. A number below or
above this range will trigger a Laser Power too Low or Laser
Power too High, respectively (see “Alarms” on page 4-35)
indicating that either the optics need to be cleaned or there is an
alignment problem.
• WetDC (W): Shows the magnitude of the DC laser power in the
measurement cell when normal sample gas is flowing through it.
Acceptable values are between 800 and 3300. A number below or
above this range will trigger a Laser Power too Low or Laser
Power too High, respectively (see “Alarms” on page 4-35)
indicating that either the optics need to be cleaned or there is an
alignment problem.
• Fit: The measure of “goodness of fit” for the last measurement point.
4–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Mid: The laser current set point after adjustment by the peak-
tracking software.
Mode 5: (Analog Output Test Mode)

Mode 5 is used to turn on the 4-20 mA current loop output (at the current set
with the 4-20 mA Test parameter) for test and calibration purposes. Press the
# key followed by the 5 key.
# + 5
<TEST 4-20MA MODE>

4-20 mA output is at
0.0% or 4.0mA
Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal 4-20 mA current loop operation.
Mode 6: (Diagnostic Data Download)

Mode 6 is used to transfer diagnostic data to the serial port and read the
individual data points of both the DC and 2f spectra that the instrument
analyzes to calculate the gas concentration. Viewing these data can be helpful
in diagnosing problems with the analyzer. Press the # key followed by the 6
key.
# + 6
<DUMP SPECTRUM MODE>

Index: 0
The data points, along with intermediate calculation results, are output to the
serial port whenever Mode 6 is selected.

Mode 7: (Measure Port1 Mode)

• Mode 7 switches the analyzer to measure validation 1 gas supply.
Press the # key followed by the 7 key.
# + 7
<MEASURE PORT1 MODE>

Validation 1 Passed
H2S: 4.0256ppmv
Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal operation measuring process gas.
Mode 8: (Measure Port2 Mode)

Mode 8 switches the analyzer to measure validation 2 gas supply. Press the #
key followed by the 8 key.
# + 8
<MEASURE PORT2 MODE>

Validation 2 Passed
H2S: 4.0256ppmv
Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal operation measuring process gas.
4–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Mode 9: (Recall Validation Results)

Mode 9 recalls the measured value from last autovalidation cycle on units with
autovalidation capability. Press the # key followed by the 9 key.
# + 9
<VALIDATION RESULTS>
Date:05-24-13 23:30
1pass 0.22ppmv
2pass 22.34ppmv
Mode TEST: (Analog Input Test Mode)

Mode Test is used to view a real-time reading of the 4-20 mA analog input
state, as well as its current raw and scaled values for test and calibration
purposes. In this mode, the analyzer functions normally, as in Mode 1, except
that the LCD (display) shows the 4-20 mA analog input signal instead of the
current concentration, temperature and pressure. Press the # key followed by
the TEST key.
# + TEST
<NORMAL MODE>
4-20mA input is ON
4095 or 68948 mb
Changing Measurement and Control Parameters

In Mode 2, all of the pertinent measurement and control parameters can be
viewed and changed. Refer to Table 4–1 for a list of parameters and value
range. The parameters are listed in the order viewed during Mode 2 operation.
Table 4–1 Typical values for parameter setpoints
Parameter Setting Function

Process Purge Time 60-9999 Sets the purge time before process
Default = 60 measurements and after a valida-
tion
Logger Rate 1–1000 readings Sets the number of measurements
Default = 16 included in the running average

Table 4-1 Typical values for parameter setpoints (Continued)

Rapid Change Monitor 0, 1 Sets the dynamic logger rate based
Default = 0 on the concentration of rate change
Temperature Unit 0 or 1 Sets the display unit for tempera-
Default = 0 ture
Pressure Unit 0, 1, 2, or 3 Sets the display unit for pressure
Default = 0
Concentration Unit 0-8 Sets the display unit for concentra-
Default = 0 tion
Custom Precision 0-5 Sets the number of viewable digits
Default = 2 to the right of the decimal point
RATA 0 or 1 Enables or disables adjustment fac-
(Relative Accuracy Default = 0 tors
Test Audit)
RATA Multiplier -1.E+06 to 1.E+06 Slope adjustment factor
Default = 1
RATA Offset -1.E+06 to 1.E+06 Offset adjustment factor
Default = 0
Peak Tracking 0, 1 or 2 Sets peak tracking capability to off, on or
Default = 0 reset for the system
New Scrub Installed 0 or 1 Resets scrubber/dryer lifetime
Default =0 monitor
Keypad Watchdog 0-9999 Sets the time in seconds before the
Default = 60 MODE screen automatically reverts
to Normal Mode
Set Time - Hour 0 - 23 Sets the current hour
Default = 0
Set Time - Minute 0 - 59 Sets the current minute
Default = 0
Set Time - Day 1 - 31 Sets the present day
Default = 0
Set Time - Month 1 - 12 Sets the present month
Default = 1
Set Time - Year 2006-2144 Sets the present year
Default = 2012
General Alarm DO 0, 1, 2 Sets the general fault alarm to be
Default = 0 latching, non-latching or reset
DO Alarm Setup 0-2147483647 Sets the functionality of the Assign-
Default = 8192 able Alarm digital output
4–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Low Alarm Setpoint -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06 Sets the concentration low alarm thresh-
Default = 0 old in ppmv or moisture dew point
High Alarm Setpoint -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06 Sets the concentration high alarm
Default = 0 threshold in ppmv or moisture dew point
AO 4-20 mA Test 0 - 100.0 Sets the 4-20 mA output to a per-
Default = 0 centage of full scale
4-20 mA Alarm Action 0, 1, 2 or 3 Sets the current loop state upon
Default = 0 alarm condition
AO 4 mA Value -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06 Sets ppmv or moisture dew point value
Default = 0 corresponding to 4 mA current loop out-
put
AO 20 mA Value -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06 Sets ppmv or moisture dew point value
Default = Full scale corresponding to 20 mA current loop
output
Calculate Dew Point 0, 1 or 2 Enables the dew point calculation
Default = 0 and controls it's output
Dew Point Method 0, 1, 2 or 3 Type of dew point calculation
Default = 0
Pipeline Pressure 0-500000 Pressure used for dew point calcu-
Default = 1000 lation
AI Pressure Input 0 or 1 Controls analog input of pipeline
Default = 0 pressure
AI 4 mA Value 0-500000 Analog input 4 mA value
Default = 0
AI 20 mA Value 0-500000 Analog input 20 mA value
Default = 100000
Modbus Address User Set, 0-250 Sets the address for the analyzer
Default = 1
Modbus Mode 0, 1, or 2 Sets type of Modbus protocol
Default = 0
2 Way Com Port 0, 1, 2, 3 Sets the port that allows two-way
Default = 11 communications
Baud Rate 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 Sets the baud rate for the customer
Default = 3 port
Val Purge Period 60 - 4000 Sets the amount of time (in sec-
Default = 60 onds) for validation gas to purge
the system
Val Duration 0 - 8000 Sets the duration (in seconds) of
Default = 240 the validation routine


Val Attempts 1 - 8000 Sets the number of validations to
Default = 2 be attempted before signaling fail-
ure
Val 1 Concentration 0-Full Scale Sets concentration of validation gas
Default = 4 supply #1
Val 2 Concentration 0-Full Scale Sets concentration of validation gas
Default = 4 supply #2
Validation Allowance 1-100 Sets acceptable deviation (in %)
Default = 100 for validation
Zero Val Tolerance 1-2000 Sets maximum acceptable zero
Default = 1 measurement reading during vali-
dation routine
Daily Validation 0 or 1 Turns daily autovalidation on or off
Default = 0
Val Interval 1 - 400 Interval (in days) between valida-
Default = 1 tion cycles
Val Start Time 0 - 23 Sets the hour of the day for valida-
Default = 8 tion
Start Validation 0 or 1 Initiates validation cycle
Default = 0
4-20 mA Val Action 0 or 1 Sets the current loop mode during
Default = 0 validation
Val Perm Constant Kp 0-1000000 Sets the system constant for the perme-
Default = 0 ation tube devices
Val Perm Rate Rp 0-1000000 Sets the calibrated permeation rate for
Default = 0 the permeation tube
Cancel Val Alarms 0 or1 Resets the validation alarms and
Default = 0 relays
Val Auto 0 or 1 Sets the analyzer to dump spec-
DumpSpectrm Default =0 trum information during a valida-
tion measurement
4–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

To change parameters in Mode 2

1. Press the # key followed by the 2 key.
# + 2
<SET PARAMETER MODE>

Enter password:
FS 5.13-XXXX
The LCD prompts for a numeric password.

2. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key
to enter the number.

Process Purge Time
60
Enter a value (secs)
3. Starting with the first parameter that displays, enter a new value
and/or press the * key to store the value and cycle to the next
parameter.
4. When finished changing or viewing the measurement and control
parameters, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode
1 and normal operation.
The scroll direction can be reversed by pressing the TEST key

followed by the * key.
Measurement and Control Parameters Defined

The definitions for the measurement and control parameters are shown below
in alphabetical order for easy reference. Refer to Table 4–1 to review order
listed during Mode 2 configuration.
2 Way Com Port

The 2 Way Com Port parameter sets the port that allows two-way
communications, including Modbus and the diagnostic protocol. Enter 0 to turn

off two-way communications, 1 for the customer port, 2 for the service port,
or 3 for the Ethernet port (if applicable).

2 Way Com Port
1
0:Off1:Cus2:Ser3:Eth
The customer port baud rate is set from the Baud Rate parameter with 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The service port baud rate is 115200 with 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. If the Ethernet port is available, refer to
“Configuring the Ethernet Port” on page 6-1 for setup information.
4-20 mA Alarm Action

The 4-20 mA Alarm Option determines the current loop state upon an alarm
condition. Enter 0 for no action, 1 for the current loop to assume a low state
upon an alarm condition, 2 for the current loop to assume a high state upon
an alarm condition, or 3 for the current loop to track and hold the current state
upon an alarm condition.

4-20mA Alarm Action
0
0:None 1:L 2:H 3:T&H
4-20 mA Val Action

The 4-20 mA Val Action parameter sets the operation mode of the 4-20 mA
current loop during validation cycles. Enter 0 for the current loop to track and
hold the last process measurement or 1 for the current loop to continue to
output the analyzer measurements during the validation cycle.

4-20 mA Val Action
0
0:Hold 1:Measure
4–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

AI 4 mA Value
The AI 4 mA Value parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar)
corresponding to a 4 mA current loop input.

AI 4 mA Value
0.00000
Enter a value (mb)
AI 20 mA Value
The AI 20 mA Value parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar)

AI 20 mA Value
100000.00000
Enter a value (mb)
AI Pressure Input
The AI Pressure Input parameter enables or disables usage of a live pipeline
pressure via the analog input for the calculation and display of dew point
temperature. There are two choices: 0 to turn the analog pressure input off,
and 1 to turn it on. If this parameter is disabled, then a fixed pipeline pressure
must be entered through the Pipeline Pressure parameter.

AI Pressure Input
0
0:Disable 1:Enable
AO 4 mA Value
The AO 4 mA Value parameter sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point
temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit), depending on whether dew

point temperature calculation and display are enabled (i.e., the Calculate Dew
Point parameter set equal to 1), corresponding to a 4 mA current loop output.

AO 4 mA Value
0.00000
ppmv or DewPoint F/C
AO 20 mA Value
The AO 20 mA Value parameter sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point
temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit), depending on whether dew
point temperature calculation and display are enabled (i.e., the Calculate Dew
Point parameter set equal to 1), corresponding to a 20 mA current loop
output.

AO 20 mA Value
20.00000
AO 4-20 mA Test
The AO 20 mA Test parameter sets the output of the current loop when in
Mode 5 for testing and calibration purposes. The value entered represents a
percent of scale value where zero equals 4 mA and full scale equals 20 mA.
Thus, the current loop output, i, is given by
i = R ( 20mA – 4mA ) + 4mA ,
where R is the AO 4-20 mA Test parameter value.

AO 4-20 mA Test
0.00000
Enter a value (%)
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate parameter sets the baud rate for the customer RS-232 port.
Enter 0 for 19200, 1 for 38400, 2 for 57600, or 3 for 115200, or 4 for 9600
4–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

baud rate. The other settings for this port are 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
and no hardware flow control.

Baud Rate
3
0:19 1:38 2:57 3:115
Make sure that the COM port used is set for the same baud rate
as the analyzer.
Calculate Dew Point

The Calculate Dew Point parameter enables or disables the calculation and
display of dew point temperature. There are three choices: 0 to turn the
calculation and display of dew point temperature off, 1 to allow the dew point
to be output on the LCD and on the analog output (setup of the AO 4 mA and
20 mA values is required), and 2 to allow the dew point to be output on the
LCD only.

Calculate Dew Point
0
0:Off 1:lcd&AO 2:lcd
Cancel Val Alarms

The Cancel Val Alarms parameter cancels the validation alarm and resets all
validation flags once activated. Entering 1 cancels the alarm. Once the action
is complete the parameter automatically reverts to 0.

Cancel Val Alarms
0
1:Cancel
Concentration Unit
The Concentration Unit parameter designates the options for measured
concentration, which include:
• 0 for ppmv
• 1 for lb/MMscf [MMscf =million standard cubic feet (15.6 °C, 101.325
kPa)]

• 2 for %
• 3 for mg/Nm3 [Nm3 = normal cubic meters (15.6 °C, 101.325 kPa)]
• 4 for ppmw
• 5 for ppbv
• 6 for ppbw
• 7 for grains/100scf
• 8 for custom display units and conversion factor (user EU Tag Part 1
and 2 as defined by Modbus registers 45203 and 45205)

Concentration Unit
0
0:ppm 1:lbs 2:% 3:mg
If the display units are correct but the conversion factor is not correct for the
application, a custom conversion factor can be defined using Modbus. To set a
custom conversion factor, first choose the correct display units (based on the
Concentration Unit parameter) and then define the conversion factor for the
associated display units using Modbus. If the Modbus register is set to 0 then
the default conversion factor is used. However, if it is set to a value greater than
0 then that value is used as the conversion factor.
If a correct concentration unit option for the display units does not exist, then
a custom display unit and conversion can be created using Modbus. To set a
custom display unit, select option 8 for the Concentration Unit parameter.
Next define the ASCII display text and associated conversion factor using
Modbus.
Custom Precision
The Custom Precision parameter sets the number of viewable digits to the
right of the decimal point. The total number of digits the analyzer can display
at any one time is six. Therefore, when the size of the value plus the Custom
Precision exceeds six, the number of digits to the right of the decimal point will
be reduced accordingly.

Custom Precision
2
Enter a value
4–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Daily Validation
The Daily Validation parameter enables or disables the time of day
autovalidation feature. When enabled, an autovalidation cycle is initiated every
‘X’ day (where ‘X’ is defined by Val Interval) at the time of day established by
Val Start Time. Enter 0 to turn the feature off or 1 to turn the feature on.

Daily Validation
0
0:Disable 1:Enable
Dew Point Method

The Dew Point Method parameter sets the type of industry standard dew
point calculation to be performed when Calculate Dew Point is enabled. Enter
0 for ISO 18453:2006, 1 for the ASTM 1142-95 Eq. (1), 2 for the ASTM 1142-
95 Eq. (2), or 3 for the Arden Buck method. Refer to Appendix C for further
information on the dew point calculation methods.

Dew Point Method
0
0:ISO1:AS12:AS23:AB
DO Alarm Setup
The DO Alarm Setup parameter sets the functionality of the Assignable
Alarm. Add together the hexadecimal values according to Table 4–2 for each
fault chosen to trigger the Assignable Alarm. Convert the resulting
hexadecimal value to a decimal value and enter the number for normally
deactivated relay functionality. Add ‘1’ to the resulting decimal value to switch
to normally activated functionality.

DO Alarm Setup
8192
Enter decimal value
For example, the hexadecimal value of 0002000 converts to decimal value of

8192, which when entered results in a normally deactivated relay triggered by
the Concentra High Alarm. Entering a value of 8193 would result normally
activated relay (fail safe) triggered by the Concentra High Alarm. To enable
the relay to be triggered by the New Scrubber Alarm as well, the two

hexadecimal values 0002000 and 8000000 are added for a result of 8002000,
which converts to a decimal value of 134225920.
Table 4–2 Assignable Alarm functionality
Bit Decimal Hex Value Alarm Functionality

0 1 00000001 Power Fail (Always Activated)
1 2 00000002 Any alarm active
2 4 00000004 Laser Power Low Alrm
3 8 00000008 Laser Powr High Alrm
4 16 00000010 Laser Zero Low Alarm
5 32 00000020 Laser Zero High Alrm
6 64 00000040 Laser Curnt Low Alrm
7 128 00000080 Laser Curnt High Alrm
8 256 00000100 Pressure Low Alarm
9 512 00000200 Pressure High Alarm
10 24 00000400 Temp Low Alarm
11 2048 00000800 Temp High Alarm
12 4096 00001000 Concentra Low Alarm
13 8192 00002000 Concentra High Alarm
14 16384 00004000 PeakTk Restart Alarm
15 32768 00008000 Fitting Restart Alrm
16 65536 00010000 Not Used
17 131072 00020000 Not Used
18 262144 00040000 Not Used
19 524288 00080000 Flow Switch Alarm
20 1048576 00100000 Val 1 Fail Alarm
21 2097152 00200000 Val 2 Fail Alarm
22 4194304 00400000 Not Used
23 8388608 00800000 Not Used
24 16777216 01000000 DeltaDC Restart Alrm
25 33554432 02000000 DeltaT Restart Alarm
4–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 4-2 Assignable Alarm functionality (Continued)
Bit Decimal Hex Value Alarm Functionality

26 67108864 04000000 Pressr Restart Alarm
27 134217728 08000000 New Scrubber Alarm
28 268435456 10000000 R2 Restart Alarm
29 536870912 20000000 R3 Restart Alarm
30 1073741824 40000000 FracShft Restrt Alrm
31 2147483648 80000000 Low Purge Rate Alarm
General Alarm DO
The General Alarm DO sets the operation of the general alarm relay digital
output when a general fault alarm occurs. The relay is normally energized
making it fail-safe for detection of not only alarms, but also power failures.
Enter 0 to make the relay latching, which means any general fault alarm will
de-energize the relay and keep it de-energized even if the alarm condition
clears. It takes a reset of the relay using this parameter to return the relay to
‘normal’ state. Enter a 1 to make the relay non-latching, which means any
general fault alarm will de-energize the relay; however, when the alarm
condition clears, the relay will automatically reset to its normal state. Enter a
2 to reset the relay and any active alarms to the ‘normal’ state. After the relay
resets, this parameter will automatically revert to the setting from before the
reset was initiated.

General Alarm DO
0
0:L 1:NonL 2:Reset
High Alarm Setpoint

The High Alarm Setpoint parameter determines the concentration threshold
above which the Concentra High Alarm fault will be triggered (see “Alarms” on
page 4-35). The value entered is compared to the moving average over the
number of measurement points set by the Logger Rate. To be turned off, the

setpoint must have a value greater than the maximum range of the analyzer
or maximum dew point.

High Alarm Setpoint
0.00000
Keypad Watchdog
The Keypad Watchdog parameter sets the allowable time (in seconds) that
the analyzer can be on the MODE screen and the Mode 2 (Set Parameter
Mode) password screen before automatically reverting to Mode 1 (Normal
Mode). Setting this parameter to a value less than five (5) will disable this
feature. If it is set for greater than or equal to five (5), then the value
represents the number of seconds before the analyzer reverts to Normal Mode.

Keypad Watchdog
60
<5:Off >=5:Secs
Logger Rate
The Logger Rate parameter sets the number of measurements included in the
running average. The display and the current loop output will each have a value
representing the running average of the concentration over a number of
measurements equal to Logger Rate.

Logger Rate
16
Enter a value
Low Alarm Setpoint

The Low Alarm Setpoint parameter determines the concentration threshold
below which the Concentra Low Alarm fault will be triggered (see “Alarms”
on page 4-35). The value entered is compared to the moving average over the
number of measurement points set by the Logger Rate. To be turned off, the
4–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

setpoint must have a value less than the minimum range of the analyzer or
minimum dew point.

Low Alarm Setpoint
0.00000
Modbus Address
The Modbus Address parameter sets the analyzer address when the analyzer
is used as a Modbus slave device. Addresses from 1 to 250 can be used.

Modbus Address
1
Enter node (1-250)
Modbus Mode
The Modbus Mode parameter sets the communications protocol for the port
selected by the 2 Way Com Port parameter. There are three choices: 0 for
turning the Modbus capabilities off and defaulting to generic serial output as
described in “Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)” on page 5-1
(the ports not designated for 2 way communications will also output the
generic serial output); 1 for enabling the analyzer to respond to Gould Modbus
RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16; and 2 for enabling the analyzer to respond to
Daniel Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16.

Modbus Mode
0
0:Off 1:GMR 2:DMR
New Scrub Installed

The New Scrub Installed parameter resets the scrubber/dryer alarm once
activated, and the scrubber/dryer lifetime monitor. The New Scrubber Alarm
fault will activate the General Fault Alarm when the scrubber/dryer capacity
is predicted to be 5% or less (refer to “Servicing the H2S Scrubber” on page

3-11 for more information). Once the scrubber/dryer is replaced, enter 1 to

reset the scrubber/dryer alarm and lifetime monitor.

New Scrub Installed
0
1:Yes
Peak Tracking
The Peak Tracking parameter enables a software utility that periodically
adjusts the laser current to keep the absorption peak of the measured
component at a known location. There are three choices: 0 for no peak
tracking, 1 for peak tracking (default) and 2 for resetting the peak to its factory
default setting. Selecting 2 will return the current analyzer midpoint to the
factory default midpoint, and then automatically revert the parameter value to
its setting before the reset was initiated. In most cases, the peak tracking
should be set to 1 for on.

Peak Tracking
1
0:Off 1:On 2:Rst
Pipeline Pressure
The Pipeline Pressure parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) in the
current dew point calculation or, if enabled, displays the current pipeline
pressure input through the AI Pressure Input.

Pipeline Pressure
10000.00000
Enter a value (mb)
4–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Pressure Unit
The Pressure Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured
absolute pressure in the cell. There are four choices: 0 for millibar, 1 for Torr,
2 for kPa, and 3 for PSIA.

Pressure Unit
0
0:mb1:Torr2:kPa3:psi
Process Purge Time

The Process Purge Time sets the time in seconds that the analyzer will purge
the system with process gas before starting a dry cycle when switching to the
process stream after a validation.

Process Purge Time
60
Rapid Change Monitor

The Rapid Change Monitor parameter enables or disables the dynamic logger
rate based on the concentration rate of change. Enter 0 to turn the feature off
or 1 to turn the feature on.

Rapid Change Monitor
0
0:Disable 1:Enable
RATA (Relative Accuracy Test Audit)

The RATA parameter enables or disables user definable values that allow
adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer reading

in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

Standard(s)” on page 4-32].

RATA
0
0:Disable 1:Enable
RATA Multiplier
The RATA Multiplier parameter is a user definable value that enables
adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response
(or slope) in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

RATA Multiplier
1.00000
Enter a value
RATA Offset
The RATA Offset parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment
(without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in the field [see
“Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page
4-32].

RATA Offset
0.00000
Enter a value
Set Time - Day

The Set Time - Day parameter sets the current day for the clock driving daily
validations.

Set Time - Day
24
Enter a value (DD)
4–26 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Set Time - Hour

The Set Time - Hour parameter sets the current hour for the clock driving
daily validations.

Set Time - Hour
7
Enter a value (0-23)
Set Time - Minute

The Set Time - Minute parameter sets the current minute for the clock driving
daily validations.

Set Time - Minute
5
Enter a value (0-59)
Set Time - Month

The Set Time - Month parameter sets the current month for the clock driving
daily validations.

Set Time - Month
5
Enter a value (MM)
Set Time - Year

The Set Time - Year parameter sets the current year for the clock driving daily
validations.

Set Time - Year
2013
Enter a value (YYYY)

Start Validation
The Start Validation parameter initiates the validation cycle. After the cycle
begins, this parameter automatically reverts to 0.

Start Validation
0
1:Start
Temperature Unit
The Temperature Unit parameter designates the display units for the
measured cell temperature. There are two choices: 0 for degrees Celsius and
1 for Fahrenheit. The default value is the standard unit of measurement in the
region the analyzer is being used.

Temperature Unit
0
0:C 1:F
Val 1 Concentration
The Val 1 Concentration parameter sets the concentration value of validation
gas supply #1. The analyzer can be configured for a zero gas by setting this
parameter to 0.0 and then setting the Zero Val Tolerance to the maximum
acceptable reading. Otherwise, set this parameter to the concentration value
of the validation gas supply and set Validation Allowance to the allowable
variation range (±%).

Val 1 Concentration
4.00000
0:ZeroGas >0:ppmvVal
When procuring a gas standard, make sure the background gas is

that specified or a mix that closely resembles the contents of the
process stream and have the gas standard certified to better than
the specified precision of the analyzer, if possible.
4–28 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Val 2 Concentration
The Val 2 Concentration parameter sets the concentration value of validation
gas supply #2. The analyzer can be configured for a zero gas by setting this
parameter to 0.0 and then setting the Zero Val Tolerance to the maximum
acceptable reading. Otherwise, set this parameter to the concentration value
of the validation gas supply and set Validation Allowance to the allowable
variation range (±%).

Val 2 Concentration
4.00000
0:ZeroGas >0:ppmvVal

Val Attempts
The Val Attempts parameter sets the maximum number of failures of the
analyzer to measure the validation gas within the set tolerances (see Zero Val
Tolerance and Validation Allowance) before stopping the autovalidation
sequence and triggering a Validation Fail Alarm.

Val Attempts
2
Enter a value
Val Auto DumpSpectrm

The Val Auto DumpSpectrm parameter determines whether a Mode 6 dump
automatically occurs after each validation measurement. There are two
choices: 0 to turn the automatic data dump during validation off, and 1 to turn
it on.

Val Auto DumpSpectrm
0
0:Disable 1:Enable

Val Duration
The Val Duration parameter sets the total number of seconds a validation
cycle will run. Actual validation measurement time is equal to Val Duration
minus Val Purge Period minus the time required to get the first measurement
value. Thus, Val Duration must be set to a value greater than the sum of
these components.

Val Duration
240
Validation Allowance
The Validation Allowance parameter sets the tolerance (±%) for validation
measurements when Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration is set to
a value greater than 0.

Validation Allowance
100.00000
% of Val Concentratn
Val Interval
The Val Interval parameter sets the number of days between autovalidation
cycles. The next scheduled validation cycle would occur in Val Interval days
at the Val Start Time.

Val Interval
1
Enter a value (days)
Val Perm Constant Kp

For systems with a permeation device, the Val Perm Constant Kp parameter
defines the system constant (Kp) for the permeation device, which is
determined at the factory at the time of calibration. The permeation device can
be replaced with another permeation device with a different permeation rate,
and the correct new permeation concentration will be calculated by the
analyzer software using the system constant. The Kp will be constant over the
4–30 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

life of the analyzer provided the temperature, sample flow rate and pressure of
the system are not changed from the factory settings.

Val Perm Constant Kp
0.24
0:Off >0:System Cons
Val Perm Rate Rp

For systems with a permeation device, the Val Perm Rate Rp parameter is
defines the permeation rate in ng/min, referenced on the permeation device
certification. When the validation concentration begins to drop steadily, the
permeation device must be replaced. When replacing the device, the Val Perm
Rate Rp must also be updated.

Val Perm Rate Rp
0.33
0:Off >0:ng/min
Val Purge Period

The Val Purge Period parameter sets the number of seconds the analyzer will
purge the system with validation gas before starting a dry cycle upon validation
initiation. Because validation gas may be introduced into the system at various
distances from the analyzer, adjustment of the Val Purge Period parameter
is necessary to optimize the time the validation gas is allowed to purge through
the transport tubing before the analyzer makes a validation measurement.
Optimization of the Val Purge Period parameter ensures an accurate
measurement of the validation gas while minimizing gas consumption.

Val Purge Period
60

Val Start Time

The Val Start Time parameter sets the hour of the day for the daily
autovalidation to begin.

Val Start Time
8
Hour of day (0-23)
Zero Val Tolerance

The Zero Val Tolerance parameter is used to set the maximum acceptable
reading when validating with zero gas. To configure the analyzer for zero gas
set the parameter Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration to 0.0.

Zero Val Tolerance
1.00000
Enter a value (ppmv)
Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

Standard(s)
In some instances, the user may wish to adjust the analyzer reading to match
the concentration (or concentrations) of a specific standard (or standards). The
RATA Multiplier and RATA Offset parameters are used to adjust the analyzer
output in the field without affecting the factory calibration. Both parameters are
used when samples from two different concentration standards are available,
whereas only the RATA Offset parameter is used when a sample from only
one concentration standard is available.
The value of the RATA Multiplier parameter, S, is determined by
C2 – C1
- ,
S = -------------------
A2 – A1
where C1 is the certified concentration of standard No. 1, C2 is the certified
concentration of standard No. 2, A1 is the measured concentration (analyzer
reading) of standard No. 1, and A2 is the measured concentration (analyzer
reading) of standard No. 2.
The RATA Offset parameter, O, is determined by
O = C1 – ( S ⋅ A1 ) ,
where S = 1 when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.
4–32 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

To adjust the analyzer reading:

1. Validate the analyzer using one or two concentration standards (see
“Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40).
SpectraSensors recommends validating the analyzer using only

the analyte mixed in the validation gas specified on the analyzer
calibration report. A bottle of test gas with certified concentrations
of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are recommended for
two point validation. For single point validation, a bottle with a
certified concentration of approximately 50% of full scale should
be used.

2. Calculate the RATA Multiplier and/or RATA Offset parameter(s)

using the equations above.
3. Enter Mode 2 by pressing the # key followed by the 2 key. The LCD
prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142)
on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number.
4. Follow the procedure under “Changing Measurement and
Control Parameters” on page 4-9 to enter the new values.
Confirm the new values by re-measuring the bottle(s) of test gas.
Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal

The 4-20 mA current loop signals are most conveniently scaled and calibrated
at the receiving end (RTU, flow computer, etc.).
The 4-20 mA current loop is factory set as the source unless

otherwise specified. Contact your sales representative if a change
is required.
To scale the receiver’s output, the analyzer’s current loop output is forced to
4 mA (0%) and 20 mA (100%) using the 4-20 mA Test parameter. The
receiver is adjusted to read “0” and “Full Scale,” respectively.
Be sure to work in a non-hazardous area while handling any

electrical connector.

To scale the current loop signal:

1. Make sure the current loop is connected and the receiver is set for
the analyzer to source the current.
2. Set the AO 4-20 mA Test parameter to 0% (see Table 4–1).
3. Enter Mode 5 by pressing the # key followed by the 5 key to force
the loop current to 4 mA.
4. Adjust the receiver calibration control to read the appropriate value.
A current loop output of 4 mA always represents the value set in AO
4 mA Value.
5. Set the 4-20 mA Test parameter to 100%.
6. Enter Mode 5 by pressing the # key followed by the 5 key to force
the loop current to 20 mA.
7. Adjust the receiver calibration controls for the appropriate value. A
current loop output of 20 mA always represents the value set in AO
20 mA Value.
8. If needed, repeat steps 2-7 to obtain an accurate calibration over the
range.
9. After obtaining an accurate calibration of the current loop receiver,
press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Normal Mode.
Each time another mode is accessed for differential systems,

regardless of whether or not a parameter has been changed, the
analyzer requires three to four minutes time upon returning to
Mode 1 to re-establish reference spectra before displaying a
reading.
Warnings
Warning messages appear on the front panel LCD and are transmitted via RS-
232. Changes in flow conditions such as composition, temperature or pressure
since the last scrubber/dryer cycle may produce a warning. Warnings typically
trigger a system re-start beginning with a fresh scrubber/dryer cycle. Warnings
may include one or more of the following:
• Dry P out of range: This warning occurs when the pressure in the
sample cell during a dry cycle is out of range indicating that the
scrubber/dryer may be clogged.
• Delta T out of range: This warning occurs when the difference
between the measured cell temperature during a wet cycle and the
previous dry cycle is out of range.
• Delta P out of range: This warning occurs when the difference
between the measured cell pressure during a wet cycle and previous
dry cycle is out of range.
4–34 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• DCdelta out of range: This warning occurs when the difference

between the measured cell DC power during a wet cycle and previous
dry cycle is out of range.
• Fitting out of range: This warning occurs when the system is
unable to adequately fit a curve to the measured signal typically as a
result of too much noise in the signal or an unexpected gas mixture
in the measurement cell.
• R2 out of range: This warning occurs when reference 2 is out of
range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found
• R3 out of range: This warning occurs when reference 3 is out of
range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found
• FracShift out of range: This warning occurs when the system is
unable to adequately fit the background curve to the measured
signal, typically as a result of an unexpected gas mixture in the
measurement cell.
• Unable to do validation: This warning occurs if using a permeation
validation system with the Daily Validation feature and the current
analyzer concentration is beyond an allowable threshold. It is
designed to protect the dryer from high concentrations, which can
shorten its life cycle. This does not apply to validations that are
initiated by the digital input, Mode 7, Mode 8 or Mode 2 Start
Validation parameter.
• Wet Peak Tracking/Dry Peak Tracking: This warning indicates
when a peak tracking correction has occurred.
Alarms
The analyzer is equipped with three dry contact relays that indicate a system
fault or alarm state. In addition, alarm and fault messages appear on the front
panel LCD and are transmitted via RS-232.
System Faults
The General Fault Alarm is triggered by system faults that cause the
General Fault Alarm relay to be activated and the current loop to respond
according to the 4-20mA Alarm Option setting. Once activated, the General
Fault Alarm can be reset via the General Alarm DO parameter (see
“Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9).
System faults include one or more of the following:
• DeltaDC Restart Alrm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused by a difference between the
measured DC signal during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle
exceeds a pre-set limit.

• DeltaT Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of

measured cell temperature during a wet cycle and the previous dry
cycle exceeds a pre-set limit.
• Fitting Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused by the system’s inability to
adequately fit a curve to the measured signal exceeds a pre-set limit.
• Flow Switch Alarm: This fault occurs on systems with a digital input
flow switch enabled and the digital input triggers the alarm state.
• FracShift Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused when the system is unable to
adequately fit the background curve to the measured signal, typically
as a result of an unexpected gas mixture in the measurement cell.
• Laser Curnt Low Alrm: This fault occurs when the laser current
goes below the minimum allowable indicating a potential problem
with the laser.
• Lasr Curnt High Alrm: This fault occurs when the laser current goes
above the maximum allowable indicating a potential problem with the
laser.
• Laser Power High Alrm: This fault occurs when the DC signal is
saturated typically as a result of the absence of absorbing gas in the
sample cell.
• Laser Power Low Alrm: This fault occurs when the DC signal
becomes too weak for a reliable measurement typically as a result of
mirror contamination.
• Laser Zero High Alarm: This fault occurs if the detector signal value
is above the set normal range when the laser is turned off.
• Laser Zero Low Alarm: This fault occurs if the detector signal value
is below the set normal range when the laser is turned off.
• Low Purge Rate Alrm: This fault occurs when the scrubber/dryer is
unable to remove the analyte being measured at a quick enough rate,
typically due to scrubber/dryer saturation.
• New Scrubber Alarm: This fault occurs when the internal
scrubber/dryer monitor signals that a new scrubber/dryer is
necessary.
• PeakTk Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused by a peak tracking correction
• Pressure High Alarm: This fault occurs when the pressure in the
sample cell exceeds the specified maximum operating pressure.
• Pressure Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the pressure in the
sample cell is below the specified minimum operating pressure.
4–36 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Pressure Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of

measured cell pressure during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle
• R2 Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused when reference 2 is out of range,
typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the
measurement cell.
• R3 Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of
consecutive system restarts caused when reference 3 is out of range,
typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the
measurement cell.
• Temp High Alarm: This fault occurs when the temperature in the
measurement cell exceeds the specified maximum operating
temperature.
• Temp Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the temperature in the
measurement cell is below the specified minimum operating
temperature.
User Alarms
User alarms are generated based on measurement readings and there relation
to Mode 2 parameter settings. They include the following:
• Concentra High Alarm: This fault occurs when the measured
concentration is above the limit set with the High Alarm Setpoint
parameter (see “High Alarm Setpoint” on page 4-21).
• Concentra Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the measured
concentration is below the set limit with the Low Alarm Setpoint
(see “Low Alarm Setpoint” on page 4-22).
• Validation 1 Failed/Validation 2 Failed Alarm: An additional
alarm for systems equipped with autovalidation that is triggered
when the measured concentration of the validation 1 or 2 gas does
not agree with the bottle certification to within the allowable limits.
These alarms also trigger the Validation Fail dry contact relay. Refer
to “Validation Allowance” on page 4-30. Once activated, the
Validation Fail Alarm must be manually reset via the Cancel Val
Alarms parameter (see “Cancel Val Alarms” on page 4-17).
For systems with heated enclosures, a Temperature too Low or

Temperature too High fault will activate the General Fault
Alarm when the enclosure temperature is more than 5 °C above
or below the specified temperature (refer to the System
Specifications for this analyzer). Once the enclosure has reached
the specified temperature, reset the General Fault Alarm (see
“Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page
4-9).

See “Troubleshooting the Analyzer” on page B-1 for recommendations

and solutions to common problems resulting in a system fault.
Historical Alarm Flag

A Historical Alarm Flag code will also appear on the LCD, as shown in Figure
4–2, and remain until the alarm is reset.
ALARM CODE
<NORMAL MODE 0000004>

H2S: 1.0256ppmv
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F
Figure 4–2 LCD display with alarm code visible

indicating Pressure Low Alarm fault
Table 4–3 lists the potential alarm codes and corresponding fault conditions. In
the event of multiple alarms, the hexadecimal code from each alarm is added
together to yield the Historical Alarm Flag code. For example, a Historical
Alarm Flag code of 00C04 indicates that three alarms have occurred: 00004
Laser Power Low Alrm, 00400 Temp Low Alarm, and 00800 Temp High
Alarm, where C represents 12 in hexadecimal notation.
Table 4–3 LCD display alarm codes
Hex Value Fault Condition

00000001 General fault condition exists or happened in the past
00000002 General fault condition exists (any alarm is active)
00000004 Laser Power Low Alrm
00000008 Laser Powr High Alrm
00000010 Laser Zero Low Alarm
00000020 Laser Zero High Alrm
00000040 Laser Curnt Low Alrm
00000080 Lasr Curnt High Alrm
4–38 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 4-3 LCD display alarm codes (Continued)
Hex Value Fault Condition

00000100 Pressure Low Alarm
00000200 Pressure High Alarm
00000400 Temp Low Alarm
00000800 Temp High Alarm
00001000 Concentra Low Alarm
00002000 Concentra High Alarm
00004000 PeakTk Restart Alarm
00008000 Fitting Restart Alrm
00010000 Not Used
00020000 Not Used
00040000 Not Used
00080000 Flow Switch Alarm

00100000 Validation Fail Alarm 1
00200000 Validation Fail Alarm 2
00400000 Not Used
00800000 Not Used
01000000 DeltaDC Restart Alrm
02000000 DeltaT Restart Alarm
04000000 Pressr Restart Alarm
08000000 New Scrubber Alarm
10000000 R2 Restart Alarm
20000000 R3 Restart Alarm
40000000 FracShft Restrt Alrm
80000000 Low Purge Rate Alrm
Assignable Alarm
The functionality of the Assignable Alarm is determined by the DO Alarm
Setup parameter set in Mode 2 according to Table 4–2. For example, the
Assignable Alarm can be configured as a Concentra High Alarm or
Concentra Low Alarm that is triggered when the measured concentration is
above or below, respectively, the level set in Mode 2. A high concentration
causes the Assignable Alarm relays to be activated and the message
“Concentration High” to appear on the LCD.

Validating the Analyzer

Validation of the analyzer using an appropriate gas standard is conducted
automatically at the hour of day set by the Val Start Time parameter (or semi-
automatically when initiated via the Validation DI or the Start Validation
parameter on systems with automatic validation).
To validate automatically:
1. Verify that the validation gas source(s) has been properly installed
and/or connected.
2. If necessary, set the current time, date and desired validation hour
(see Table 4–1 for parameter default values).
3. Set the Daily Validation parameter to 1. The analyzer should run
a validation cycle at the number of days and hour set by Val
Interval and the Val Start Time parameter.
To validate semi-automatically:
1. Verify that the validation gas source(s) has been properly installed
and/or connected.
2. Initiate a validation cycle by closing the contacts connected to the
Validation DI input or by setting the Start Validation parameter to
1.
The keypad is disabled when Validation DI is active. Once

Validation DI completes, the analyzer requires three to four
minutes upon returning to Mode 1 to re-establish reference
spectra before displaying a reading.
Once a validation cycle is underway, the appropriate relay (Val #1 Active or Val
#2 Active) will be activated. If the concentration measured does not fall within
the allowable limits (see “Validation Allowance” on page 4-30), the
Validation Fail Alarm relay will activate. Once activated, the Validation Fail
Alarm must be manually cancelled (see “Cancel Val Alarms” on page 4-17).

calibration report. A bottle of test gas with a certified
concentration representing 50% of full scale) for single validation
systems), or bottles representing 20% and 80% of full scale (for
dual validation systems) are recommended.

4–40 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Calibrating the Analyzer

Calibrating the analyzer is typically not required under normal circumstances.
SpectraSensors calibrates each analyzer to a National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) traceable standard before shipping the unit to the end
user. Because SpectraSensors analyzers use a non-contact form of
measurement, they are relatively insensitive to contamination, are quite
rugged and virtually maintenance free ensuring years of reliable service.

4–42 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

5 - FIRMWARE FS 5.13 SERIAL PORT
COMMUNICATIONS
Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)
When the Modbus Mode parameter is set to 0, the analyzer is configured to
transfer a string of data from the analyzer to a serial device via the customer
port output. The receiving device is typically a computer terminal running
HyperTerminal, which is a program included with Microsoft® Windows® 95, 98,
and XP that enables serial communication and the viewing, capturing and
storage of serial port data and messages.
To launch HyperTerminal:
1. On your Windows desktop, click Start followed by Run (usually
located in the lower right side of the Start Menu).
2. Type Hypertrm.exe and hit Return to launch HyperTerminal.
For faster access to HyperTerminal, save a HyperTerminal

shortcut to the desktop.
3. Once HyperTerminal is activated, the Connection Description

window appears, as shown in Figure 5–1. Type in a Filename
(where the terminal session settings will be stored for future recall)
and click on any icon. Click OK.
4. The Connect To window appears prompting for a connection, as
shown in Figure 5–2. Click the Menu Arrow under Connect Using
to view the choices.
5. Click on the appropriate port to which your analyzer is connected
(COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.) as established under “Connecting the
Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15. Click OK.
6. Once the port is chosen, the COM Properties window appears.
Make sure the COM properties for the port selected reflect those
shown in Figure 5–3 (19200 baud or as set in Mode 2, 8 data bits,
1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control).
7. Click OK to establish the connection.
Once connected, the data will start streaming through the Hyperterminal
Window as shown in Figure 5–4.

Figure 5–1 Connection Description window (FS 5.13)
Figure 5–2 Connect To window (FS 5.13)
5–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Firmware FS 5.13 Serial Port Communications
Figure 5–3 COM Properties window (FS 5.13)
Refer to
data output
headings in
Figure 5–5;
reading left
to right
Figure 5–4 Hyperterminal window with streaming

data (FS 5.13)

Figure 5–5 Sample diagnostic data output (FS 5.13)
5–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13
The data string is tab delimited forming columns in the following order:
• Date: Current date (in MM:DD:YY)
• Time: Current time (in HH:MM:SS)
• Concentration (ppmv): Current measured analyte/component
concentration (ppmv)
• Wet Temp (C): Current temperature (C) of the gas sample when
normal sample gas is flowing
• Wet Pressure (mb): Current pressure (mb) of the gas sample when
normal sample gas is flowing
• Dry Temp: Current temperature (0.0 for non-differential units) of
the gas sample (in selected engineering units) when scrubbed
sample gas is flowing.
• Dry Pressure: Current pressure (0.0 for non-differential units) of
the gas sample (in selected engineering units) when scrubbed
sample is flowing.
• Fit Residue: Value ranging from 0 to 1 indicating how well the
measured spectrum fits the referenced spectrum, where 1 represents
a perfect match.
• Fit Ratio: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 1
spectrum.
• Dry DC: Signal level (laser intensity in counts, 0.0 for non-
differential units) at the high end of the current ramp during the dry
cycle.
• Wet DC: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp during the
wet cycle.
• Peak Index: Peak index of the measured spectrum.
• Ref Index: Peak index used for reference.
• Index Difference: Difference between measured and reference
peak indices, where a value other than 0 indicates peak tracking is
functioning.
• Val Flg: Indicates current stream being measured (0 = Process, 1 =
Va 1, 2 = Val 2).
• Process Path Flg: Calculation path (reference spectra) used for the
concentration calculation (0 = Process Reference Spectra, 1 =
Validation Reference Spectra).
• Current Midpoint: Current midpoint that the analyzer is using,
including any peak tracking adjustments.
• Fit Ratio 2: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 2
spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference 2 spectrum
was not used in the calculation of concentration.


• Fit Ratio Dry: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference
Dry spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference Dry
spectrum was not used in the calculation of concentration.
• Fit Ratio Dry-1: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the
Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value, where a value of 0
indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value
• Alarm Flags: Value representing the status of each individual alarm
in the analyzer, as listed in Table 4–2.
Any alarm messages would be transmitted along with the data string and
would appear in a separate row.
The number of seconds between each line of data output should

be the # Spectrum Average number set in Mode 2 divided by
4. The factory default setting of 16 for # Spectrum Average
results in a line of output each 4 seconds.
To capture and save data from the serial port:

1. To save the data from the serial port, use the Transfer/Capture
Text function and enter the Filename to where you would like to
store the captured data.
2. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture
Text/Stop.
To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal:

1. Before entering Mode 6, make sure the serial port on the computer
used for serial communication is connected to the analyzer and the
output stream is showing on the screen as described under “To
launch HyperTerminal” on page 5-1.
5–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

3. Once capturing is in place, enter Mode 6 by pressing # key followed

by the 6 key.
# + 6

Index: 0
The index shown on the LCD display counts by 50’s from 0 to 511.
The analyzer will repetitively output this information until the #
button is pressed. At the end of the data dump, the screen will
display:
MODE
4. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.

5. Once normal operation resumes, stop the capture of the serial data.
To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture
Text/Stop. The resulting data file contains the downloaded data as
shown in Figure 5–5.
The 16 columns of tab delimited data in the file resulting from a Mode 6 data
dump are labelled as follows:
• Index: Index value of points on spectrum scan curve
• Dry DC: Dry DC spectrum of sample gas
• Dry DC Ref 1: Reference 1 dry DC spectrum
• Wet DC: Wet DC spectrum of sample gas
• Wet DC Ref 1: Reference 1 wet DC spectrum
• Dry 2f: Dry AC spectrum of sample gas
• Wet 2f: Wet AC spectrum of sample gas
• Dry 2f Ref 1 Pdry: Reference 1 dry AC spectrum based on dry
pressure
• Wet 2f Ref 1 PwetFR: Reference 1 wet AC spectrum based on wet
pressure and adjusted for the current fitting ratio

• 2f: AC spectrum of sample gas

• Ref 1: Reference 1 AC spectrum
• Val Ref: Reference Validation AC spectrum
• Val Ref Dry Pdry: Reference Validation dry AC spectrum based on
dry pressure
• Val Ref Wet PwetFR: Reference Validation wet AC spectrum based
on wet pressure and adjusted for the current fitting ratio
• Composite Ref: Recreated AC spectrum based on the reference
curve fitting ratios
Modbus Communications Protocol

Modbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for
use with its programmable logic controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto
standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly
available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. Modbus is used
extensively in leu of other communications protocols because it is openly
published and royalty-free, relatively easy to deploy, and capable of moving
raw bits or words without placing many restrictions on vendors.
Modbus enables communication between many devices connected to the same
network, for example, a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit
(RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.
The SpectraSensors analyzer acts as a slave in a master/slave(s) network of
devices. It can receive queries from a master and send responses back using
either Gould Modbus RTU protocol or Daniel Extended Modbus RTU protocol.
Framing/Protocol
The transmission mode used to communicate is either Gould Modbus RTU or
Daniel Modbus RTU with port parameters 9600 to 115200 (baud rate), 8 (data
bits), 1 (stop bit), no (parity), and none (flow control/handshake).
The transmission mode is set by the user via the Modbus Mode parameter
(see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13). Note that the
generic serial output (HyperTerminal) is disabled if either Gould or Daniel
Modbus is selected.
5–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Functions
Available functions are 0x03 (read holding registers), 0x06 (write to a single
register), 0x10 (write to multiple registers), and 0x2B (read device
identification).
Addressing
The analyzer's Modbus slave node address can be in the range of 0-250 with
the default being 1. All analyzers will respond to an address of 0, so this
address can be used to interrogate a single unit when its address is unknown
or to determine its address.
See Table 5–1 for register definitions for both Gould and Daniel Modbus modes.
Be aware that for Gould Modbus the table follows the convention of identifying
the register with an offset of 40001. Therefore, the actual value transmitted in
the starting register field of the command is the listed register value minus
40001 (e.g., register 47001 is addressed as 7000).
Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode

Daniel Modbus supports three types of registers: short integer, long integer and
floating point. Each “short integer” register is two bytes in length and will
contain an integer value. Each “long integer” register is four bytes in length and
will contain an integer value and each “floating point” register is four bytes in
length and will contain a floating point value.
Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode

Gould Modbus supports three types of variable data, short integer, long integer
and floating point, but all registers are addressed as word (two byte) registers.
A “short integer” value is contained in one register whereas a “long integer” or
“floating point” value requires two contiguous registers. The registers are
defined as Read or Read/Write.
Use caution when writing to registers as changing the value of a

writable register may affect the calibration of the analyzer.
An appropriate password must be downloaded to the password register prior

to writing to most registers. The User Level 1 (L1) user password 3142 will
allow access to those registers which have been pre-defined as user
configurable. Other writable registers can only be downloaded or changed by
SpectraSensors support personnel using a User Level 2 (L2) password.
Endianness
Endianness, often referred to as byte order, is the ordering of individually
addressable sub-units (words, bytes, or even bits) within a longer data word.

Byte orders with the most versus least significant byte first are called big-
endian and little-endian, respectively. In SpectraSensors analyzers, all bytes
are stores big-endian. Thus, for floating point and long-integer data types, the
byte order will look like:
HighWord-HighByte HighWord-LowByte LowWord-HighByte LowWord-LowByte
Note that floating point values follow the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point
Arithmetic (IEEE 754-2008).
To enable Modbus communications:

1. Confirm that the serial cable has been properly connected (see
“Connecting the Signals and Alarms” in the SS2100 Hardware
Manual).
2. Power up the analyzer (see “Powering Up the Analyzer” on page
4-1).
3. Enter Mode 2 by pressing the # key followed by the 2 key.

Enter password:
FS 5.13-XXXX
The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password
(3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number to
enter Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode).

Process Purge Time
60
Enter a value(secs)
4. Press the * key repeatedly until the Modbus Address parameter is

displayed.

Modbus Address
1
Enter node (1-250)
5–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

5. Enter the desired Modbus Address and press the * key to store the
value and cycle to the Modbus Mode parameter.

Modbus Mode
0
0:Off 1:GMR 2:DMR
6. Enter the desired Modbus Mode and press the * key to store the
value (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13).
7. Enter the 2 Way Com Port assignment.

2 Way Com Port
1
0:Off1:Cus2:Ser3:Eth
8. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.The

analyzer is now ready to receive Modbus queries.
Table 5–1 Modbus register map [FS 5.13]
Daniel Gould Data

Parameter Action Min. Max.
Reg. Reg. Type
Concentration 7001 47001 Float Read - -
Temperature 7002 47003 Float Read - -
Pressure 7003 47005 Float Read - -
Concentration ppmv 7004 47007 Float Read - -
Wet Temp C 7005 47009 Float Read - -
Wet Pressure mb 7006 47011 Float Read - -
Fit Residue 7007 47013 Float Read - -
Current Midpoint 7008 47015 Float Read - -
DC Level 7010 47019 Float Read - -
Zero Level 7011 47021 Float Read - -
Val Date 7026 47051 Float Read - -
Val Time 7027 47053 Float Read - -
Val 1 Value 7028 47055 Float Read - -
Val 2 Value 7029 47057 Float Read - -

Table 5-1 Modbus register map [FS 5.13] (Continued)
Daniel Gould Data

Reg. Reg. Type
Val 1 Value ppmv 7030 47059 Float Read - -
Val 2 Value ppmv 7031 47061 Float Read - -
Dry Temp C 7041 47081 Float Read - -
Dry Pressure mb 7042 47083 Float Read - -
Dry DC Level 7043 47085 Float Read - -
Common Weight 7051 47101 Float Read - -
Fitting Ratio 7052 47103 Float Read - -
Fitting Ratio 2 7053 47105 Float Read - -
Fitting Ratio Dry 7057 47113 Float Read - -
Fitting Ratio Dry-1 7058 47115 Float Read - -
Cross Shift 7060 47119 Float Read - -
Peak Track Index 7061 47121 Float Read - -
Peak Index Ref 7062 47123 Float Read - -
Peak Track Index Dry 7091 47181 Float Read - -
Peak Index Ref Dry 7092 47183 Float Read - -
RATA Multiplier 7101 47201 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
RATA Offset 7102 47203 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
Low Alarm Setpoint 7103 47205 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
High Alarm Setpoint 7104 47207 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
AO 4 mA Value 7105 47209 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+05
AO 20 mA Value 7106 47211 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+05
AO 4-20 mA Test 7107 47213 Float R/W L1 0 100
AI 4 mA Value 7108 47215 Float R/W L1 0 499999
AI 20 mA Value 7109 47217 Float R/W L1 0 499999
Val 1 Concentration 7110 47219 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
Val 2 Concentration 7111 47221 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
Validation Allowance 7112 47223 Float R/W L1 0 100
Zero Val Tolerance 7113 47225 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
5–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 5-1 Modbus register map (Continued)
Daniel Gould Data

Reg. Reg. Type
Pipeline Pressure 7125 47249 Float R/W L1 5000 499999
ppmv ConvFactor 00 7139 47277 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
lb ConvFactor 01 7140 47279 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
% ConvFactor 02 7141 47281 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
mg ConvFactor 03 7142 47283 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
ppmw ConvFactor 04 7143 47285 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
ppbv ConvFactor 05 7144 47287 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
ppbw ConvFactor 06 7145 47289 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
grn ConvFactor 07 7146 47291 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
user ConvFactor 08 7147 47293 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06
Val Perm Constant Kp 7212 47423 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
Val Perm Rate Rp 7213 47425 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06
Alarm Flags 5001 45001 Long Read - -
Status Flags 5002 45003 Long Read - -
DO Alarm Setup 5101 45201 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09
user EU Tag Part 1 5102 45203 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09
user EU Tag Part 2 5103 45205 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09
Serial Date 3001 43001 Integer Read - -
Serial Number 3002 43002 Integer Read - -
Current 2F Flag 3103 43103 Integer Read - -
Logger Rate 3202 43202 Integer R/W L1 1 1000
4-20 mA Alarm Action 3204 43204 Integer R/W L1 0 3
Temperature Unit 3205 43205 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Pressure Unit 3206 43206 Integer R/W L1 0 3
Concentration Unit 3207 43207 Integer R/W L1 0 8
Modbus Address 3208 43208 Integer R/W L1 0 250
Modbus Mode 3209 43209 Integer R/W L1 0 2
AI Pressure Input 3210 43210 Integer R/W L1 0 1
RATA 3211 43211 Integer R/W L1 0 1
New Scrub Installed 3212 43212 Integer R/W L1 0 1
General Alarm DO 3213 43213 Integer R/W L1 0 2
Baud Rate 3214 43214 Integer R/W L1 0 4

Table 5-1 Modbus register map (Continued)
Daniel Gould Data

Reg. Reg. Type
Set Time - Year 3215 43215 Integer R/W L1 2007 2143
Set Time - Month 3216 43216 Integer R/W L1 1 12
Set Time - Day 3217 43217 Integer R/W L1 1 31
Set Time - Hour 3218 43218 Integer R/W L1 0 23
Set Time - Minute 3219 43219 Integer R/W L1 0 59
Cancel Val Alarms 3220 43220 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Daily Validation 3221 43221 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Val Start Time 3222 43222 Integer R/W L1 0 23
Val Interval 3223 43223 Integer R/W L1 1 400
Start Validation 3224 43224 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Val Purge Period 3225 43225 Integer R/W L1 0 4000
Val Duration 3226 43226 Integer R/W L1 0 8000
Val Attempts 3227 43227 Integer R/W L1 1 8000
4-20 mA Val Action 3228 43228 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Val Auto DumpSpec- 3230 43230 Integer R/W L1 0 1

trm
Calculate Dew Point 3252 43252 Integer R/W L1 0 2
Dew Point Method 3253 43253 Integer R/W L1 0 3
2 Way Com Port 3365 43365 Integer R/W L1 0 3
Keypad Watchdog 3368 43368 Integer R/W L1 0 9999
Rapid Change Monitor 3402 43402 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Process Purge Time 3408 43408 Integer R/W L1 60 9999
Custom Precision 3413 43413 Integer R/W L1 0 5
Peak Tracking 3419 43419 Integer R/W L1 0 2
Password 4999 44999 Integer R/W L0 0 9999
Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions

For definitions of the Modbus accessible parameters shown in Table 5–1, see
below. For more detailed information, refer to “Measurement and Control
Parameters Defined” on page 4-13.
• % ConvFactor 02: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 2 (%) and this value is greater than
0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is used.
5–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• 2 Way Com Port: Sets the port that allows two-way

communications, including Modbus and the diagnostic protocol.
• 4-20 mA Alarm Action: Determines the current loop state upon an
alarm condition.
• 4-20 mA Val Action: Sets the operation mode of the 4-20 mA
current loop during validation cycles.
• AI 4 mA Value: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) corresponding
to a 4 mA current loop input.
• AI 20 mA Value: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar)
• AI Pressure Input: Enables or disables the analog input pipeline
pressure capability.
• AO 4mA Value: Sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point
temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit) corresponding to a 4
mA current loop output.
• AO 20mA Value: Sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point
temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit) corresponding to a 20
mA current loop output.
• AO 4-20 mA Test: Sets the 4-20 mA output to a percentage of full
scale when in Mode 5.
• Alarm Flags: Long integer register identifying the current status of
each individual alarm in the analyzer, as shown in Table 4–3.
• Baud Rate: Sets the baud rate for the customer port.
• Calculate Dew Point: Enables the calculation of the dew point value
and controls where the value will be output.
• Cancel Val Alarms: Cancels all validation alarms once activated.
• Common Weight: Ratio of the measured spectrum that did not
match a reference spectrum.
• Concentration: Current measured (live) analyte concentration in
selected engineering units.
• Concentration ppmv: Current measured (live) analyte
concentration in parts per million by volume (ppmv).
• Concentration Unit: Sets the display units for the measured
concentration.
• Cross Shift: The amount of shift applied to match the measured
spectrum to the reference spectrum when using Cross Correlation.
• Current 2F Flag: Displays the current scrubber protection usage
level: 0 = standard protection (used for non-differential units), 1 =
mid protection, 2 = high protection, 3 = max protection (no usage).
• Current Midpoint: Current midpoint that the analyzer is using,
including any peak tracking adjustments.

• Custom Precision: Sets the number of viewable digits to the right

of the decimal point.
• Daily Validation: Enables or disables the autovalidation feature.
• DC Level: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp.
• Dew Point Method: Sets the type of dew point calculation to be
performed when Calculate Dew Point is enabled.
• DO Alarm Setup: Sets the functionality of the Assignable Alarm.
• Dry DC Level: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp
during the dry cycle.
• Dry Pressure mb: Current measured dry pressure of the gas
sample in millibar (mb)
• Dry Temp C: Current measured dry temperature of the gas sample
in degrees in celsius.
• Fit Residue: Value ranging from 0 to 1 indicating how well the
measured spectrum fit the referenced spectrum, where 1 represents
a perfect match.
• Fitting Ratio: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference
1 or Validation spectrum.
• Fitting Ratio 2: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the
Reference 2 spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the
Reference 2 spectrum was not used in the calculation of
concentration.
concentration.
concentration.
concentration.
• Fitting Ratio Dry: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the
Reference Dry spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the
Reference Dry spectrum was not used in the calculation of
concentration.
• Fitting Ratio Dry-1: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the
Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value, where a value of 0
indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value
5–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• General Alarm DO: Sets the operation of the general alarm relay
digital output when a general fault alarm occurs.
• grn ConvFactor 07: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 7 (grains/100scf) and this value
is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is
equal to 0.0.
• High Alarm Setpoint: Determines the concentration threshold
above which the Concentra High Alarm will be triggered.
• Keypad Watchdog: Sets the allowable time (in seconds) that the
analyzer can be on the MODE screen and the Mode 2 (Set Parameter
Mode) password screen before automatically reverting to Mode 1
(Normal Mode).
• lb ConvFactor 01: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 1 (lbs/MMscf) and this value is
greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is
equal to 0.0.
• Logger Rate: Sets the number of measurements included in the
running average.
• Low Alarm Setpoint: Determines the concentration threshold
below which the Concentra Low Alarm will be triggered.
• mg ConvFactor 03: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 3 (mg/Nm3) and this value is
greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is
equal to 0.0.
• Modbus Address: Sets the analyzer address when the analyzer is
used as a Modbus slave device.
• Modbus Mode: Sets the communications protocol for the port
selected by the 2 Way Com Port parameter.
• New Scrub Installed: Resets the scrubber/dryer alarm once
activated, and the scrubber/dryer lifetime monitor.
• Password: Required to access the system to download (i.e.,
change) register settings.
• Pipeline Pressure: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) in the
current dew point calculation or, if enabled, displays the current
pipeline pressure input through the AI Pressure Input.
• Pressure: Current measured (live) wet pressure reading of the gas
sample in selected engineering units.
• Pressure Unit: Designates the display units for the measured
absolute pressure in the cell.
• Peak Index Ref: Peak index used for reference.
• Peak Index Ref Dry: Peak index (0.0 for non-differential units)
used for reference from the last scrubber cycle.

• Peak Track Index: Peak index of the measured spectrum.

• Peak Track Index Dry: Peak index (0.0 for non-differential units)
of the measured spectrum from the last scrubber cycle.
• Peak Tracking: A software utility that periodically adjusts the laser
current to keep the absorption peak of the measured component at
a known location.
• ppbv ConvFactor 05: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 5 (ppbv) and this value is greater
than 0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is
used.
• ppbw ConvFactor 06: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 6 (ppbw) and this value is greater
than 0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is
used.
• ppmv ConvFactor 00: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 0 (ppmv) and this value is greater
than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.
• ppmw ConvFactor 04: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 4 (ppmw) and this value is greater
than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.
• Process Purge Time: Sets the time in seconds that the analyzer will
purge the system with process gas before starting a dry cycle when
switching to the process stream after a validation.
• Rapid Change Monitor: Enables or disables the dynamic logger
rate based on the concentration rate of change.
• RATA: Enables or disables user definable values that allow
adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer
reading in the field.
• RATA Multiplier: User definable value that enables adjustment
(without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response
(or slope) in the field.
• RATA Offset: User definable value that enables adjustment (without
affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in the field.
• Serial Date: Date the analyzer was calibrated.
• Serial Number: Serial number of the analyzer.
• Set Time - Day: Sets the current day for the clock driving daily
validations.
• Set Time - Hour: Sets the current hour for the clock driving daily
validations.
• Set Time - Minute: Sets the current minute for the clock driving
daily validations.
5–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Set Time - Month: Sets the current month for the clock driving daily
validations.
• Set Time - Year: Sets the current year for the clock driving daily
validations.
• Start Validation: Initiates the validation cycle.
• Status Flags: Long integer register identifying the occurrence of
various events in the analyzer, as shown in Table 5–2.
Table 5–2 Status flags
Hex
Bit Status
Value
0 00001 Current measurement valid (wet cycle active)
1 00002 Wet purging complete, wet measurement in progress
2 00004 Wet purging in progress
3 00008 Dry purging complete, dry measurement in progress
4 00010 Dry purging in progress
5 00020 Validation Mode
6 00040 Validation Flag 1
7 00080 Validation Flag 2
• Temperature: Current measured (live) wet temperature of the gas

sample in selected engineering units.
• Temperature Unit: Designates the display units for the measured
cell temperature.
• user ConvFactor 08: Sets a custom conversion factor when the
parameter Concentration Unit = 8 (user EU Tag Part 1 and 2) and
this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used
when it is equal to 0.0.
• user EU Tag Part 1: Sets a custom engineering unit tag name for
the beginning four ASCII characters. For example: A is ASCII hex
value 41, so AAAA would be 41414141, which would be
1,094,795,585 in decimal format. Refer to Table 5–3.
• user EU Tag Part 2: Sets a custom engineering unit tag name for
the last four ASCII characters. For example: A is ASCII hex value 41,
so AAAA would be 41414141, which would be 1,094,795,585 in
decimal format. Refer to Table 5–3.

Table 5–3 ASCII Character Map
To find the hexadecimal value in Table 5–3, first find the character needed
in the table. Trace to the reference number in the column header (c) at the
top of the table, then to the row to the left (r) to create the value (cr). For
example, locate the ‘A’ in the table. The ‘A’ corresponds with the value (4)
in the column header at the top of the table. Next, follow the row in which
‘A’ is present to the value at the left of the table (1). Combined, these cre-
ate the hexadecimal value of 41.
• Val 1 Concentration: Sets the concentration value of validation gas
supply #1.
• Val 2 Concentration: Sets the concentration value of validation gas
supply #2.
5–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Val 1 Value: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 1

reading in selected engineering units.
• Val 2 Value: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 2
reading in selected engineering units.
• Val 1 Value ppmv: Measured analyte concentration of last
validation 1 reading in parts per million by volume (ppmv)
• Val 2 Value ppmv: Measured analyte concentration of last
validation 2 reading in parts per million by volume (ppmv)
• Val Attempts: Sets the maximum number of failures of the analyzer
to measure the validation gas within the set tolerances before
stopping the autovalidation sequence and triggering a Validation
Fail Alarm.
• Val Auto DumpSpectrm: Determines whether a Mode 6 dump
automatically occurs after each validation measurement.
• Val Date: Date of the last validation.
• Validation Allowance: Sets the tolerance (±%) for validation
measurements when Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration
is set to a value greater than 0.
• Val Duration: Sets the total number of seconds a validation cycle
will run.
• Val Interval: Sets the number of days between autovalidation
cycles.
• Val Perm Constant Kp: Sets the system constant that is
determined at the factory at the time of calibration.
• Val Perm Rate Rp: Sets the permeation rate in ng/min referenced
on the certification for the permeation device.
• Val Purge Period: Sets the number of seconds the analyzer will
purge the system with validation gas before starting a dry cycle upon
validation initiation.
• Val Start Time: Sets the hour of the day for the daily autovalidation
to begin.
• Val Time: Time of the last validation.
• Wet Pressure mb: Current measured (live) wet pressure reading of
the gas sample in millibar (mb).
• Wet Temp C: Current measured (live) temperature of the gas
sample in degrees celsius.
• Zero level: Signal level when the laser is turned off.
• Zero Val Tolerance: Used to set the maximum acceptable reading
when validating with zero gas.

5–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

6 - ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
Configuring the Ethernet Port
The ethernet port must be properly configured to communicate on a network
with a serial device. The ethernet port has been factory set as follows:
• IP Address: 192.168.0.1
• Data Port: 10001
• Configuration Port: 9999
The configuration is stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained without
power. The configuration can be changed at any time.
If the IP address or any other setting needs to be changed, the ethernet port
Setup Mode can be accessed using a Telnet connection to configure the port
locally or over the network.
To configure the ethernet port:•

2. Type the following command: telnet 192.168.0.1 9999.
3. Click OK to establish a Telnet connection. The following message
appears:
MAC address XXXXXXXXXXXX (E.g., 00204A808BE8)

Software version V6.3.0.3RC3 (061110) (Version may vary by system)
Press Enter for Setup Mode
4. To enter Setup Mode, press Enter within 5 seconds. The

configuration settings display, followed by the Change Setup menu.
Change Setup:
0 Server
1 Channel 1
5 Expert
6 Security
7 Defaults
8 Exit without save
9 Save and exit Your choice ?
5. Select an option on the menu by entering the number of the option

in the “Your choice ?” field and pressing Enter.
6. To enter a value for a parameter, type the value and press Enter, or
to confirm a current value, just press Enter.
7. When finished, save the new configuration (option 9). The port will
reboot after the configuration has been stored.

Setup Mode: Server Configuration (Option 0)

The unit’s basic network parameters display when you select Server
Configuration (option 0). The IP Address, Set Gateway IP Address, and
Netmask fields display the current values.
IP Address : (192) .(168) .(000) .(001)

Set Gateway IP Address (Y) ?
Gateway IP addr (192) .(168) .(000) .(001)
Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part (0=default) (16)
Change telnet config password (N) ?
IP Address
If DHCP is not used to assign IP addresses, enter the IP address manually. The
IP address must be set to a unique value in the network. Enter each octet and
press Enter between each section. The current value displays in parentheses.
IP Address : (000) (000) (000) (000) _
If DHCP is used, the third octet of the IP address sets the BootP/DHCP/AutoIP
options. To disable an option, set the appropriate bit according to Table 6–1.
Table 6–1 BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options
Bit Option
0 AutoIP
1 DHCP
2 BootP
For example, if the third octet is 0.0.5.0, the AutoIP and BootP options are
disabled; only DHCP is enabled. (The value 5 results from adding the binary
equivalents of 0 and 2.) This is the most common setting when using DHCP.
Set Gateway IP Address

The gateway address, or router, allows communication to other LAN segments.
The gateway address should be the IP address of the router connected to the
same LAN segment as the unit. The gateway address must be within the local
network. The default is N (No), meaning the gateway address has not been set.
To set the gateway address, type Y and enter the address.
Set Gateway IP Adress (N) ? Y

Gateway IP addr (000) (000) (000) (000)_
Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part

A netmask defines the number of bits taken from the IP address that are
assigned for the host part.
6–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Ethernet Communications
Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part (0=default) (0) _
The unit prompts for the number of host bits to be entered, then calculates the
netmask, which appears in standard decimal-dot notation, as shown in
Table 6–2, when the saved parameters display.
Table 6–2 Standard IP network netmasks
Network Class Host Bits Netmask
A 24 255.0.0.0
B 16 255.255.0.0
C 8 255.255.255.0
Change Telnet Configuration Password

Setting the Data configuration password prevents unauthorized access to the
setup menu through a Data connection to port 9999. The password must have
four characters.
Change telnet config password (N) ? _
A password is not necessary to access the Setup Mode window

via a serial connection.
DHCP Name
If a DHCP server has automatically assigned the IP address and network
settings, this address does not appear in the unit’s Setup Mode. You can
discover the unit by using Monitor Mode (see “Monitor Mode” on page
6-21).)
When Monitor Mode is accessed from the serial port with

network connection enabled, issuing the NC (Network
Communication) command will display the unit’s IP configuration.
There are three methods for assigning DHCP names to the unit:
• Default DHCP Name: If the DHCP name has not been changed and
an IP of 0.0.0.0 is being used, the DHCP name defaults to CXXXXXX
[XXXXXX is the last 6 digits of the MAC (hardware) address shown on
the label on the bottom/side of the ethernet port]. For example, if the
MAC address is 00-20-4A-12-34-56, then the default DHCP name is
C123456.
• Custom DHCP Name: If using an IP address of 0.0.0.0, the last
option in Server Configuration is “Change DHCP device name.” This

option allows the DHCP name to be changed to an alphanumeric

name (XPort Direct in this example).
Change DHCP device name (not set) ? (N) Y

Enter new DHCP device name : XPort Direct
• Numeric DHCP Name: The DHCP name can be changed by

specifying the last octet of the IP address. When using this method,
the DHCP name would be XPort DirectYY, where YY represents the
last octet of the IP address. For example, if the IP address is
0.0.0.12, then the DHCP name would be XPort Direct12. This method
only works with 2-digit numbers (01-99).
Setup Mode: Channel Configuration (Option 1)

The unit’s serial port parameters display when you select Channel 1 (option 1)
from the Change Setup menu.
Change Setup:
0 Server
1 Channel 1
5 Expert
6 Security
7 Defaults
8 Exit without save
9 Save and exit Your choice ? 1
These parameters define how the serial port responds to network and serial
communications. The following sections describe the configurable parameters
within the Channel Configuration menu.
Baud Rate
The unit and attached serial device, such as a modem, must agree on a speed
or baud rate to use for the serial connection. Valid baud rates are 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400
bits per second.
Baudrate (9600) ?
I/F (Interface) Mode

The Interface Mode is a bit-coded byte entered in hexadecimal notation.
I/F Mode (4C) ?
Interface Mode options are listed in Table 6–3.

Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits
for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1. Some common
Interface Mode settings are listed in Table 6–4.
6–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6–3 Interface Mode options
I/F Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RS-232Ca 0 0
RS-422/485 4-wireb 0 1
RS-485 2-wireb 1 1
7 Bit 1 0
8 Bit 1 1
No Parity 0 0
Even Parity 1 1
Odd Parity 0 1
1 stop bit 0 1
2 stop bitsa 1 1
a. 2 stop bits are implemented by the software. This might influence perfor-
mance.
b. The RTS pin is used for RS-485 transmitter control.
Table 6–4 Common Interface Mode settings
I/F Mode Setting Binary Hex
RS-232C, 8-bit, No Parity, 1 stop bit 0100 1100 4C
RS-232C, 7-bit, Even Parity, 1 stop bit 0111 1000 78
RS-485 2-wire, 8-bit, No Parity, 1 stop bit 0100 1111 4F
RS-422, 8-bit, Odd Parity, 1 stop bit 0101 1101 5D
Flow
Flow control sets the local handshaking method for stopping serial
input/output.
Flow (00) ?
Flow control options are listed in Table 6–5.
Table 6–5 Flow control options
Flow Control Option Hex
No flow control 00
XON/XOFF flow control 01
Hardware handshake with RTS/CTS lines 02
XON/XOFF pass characters to host 05

Port Number
This setting represents the source port number in TCP connections, which
identifies the channel for initiating connections remotely.
Port No (10001) ?
The default setting for Port 1 is 10001. The range is 1-65535, except for the
reserved port numbers listed in Table 6–6.
Table 6–6 Reserved port numbers
Port Number Designation
1–1024 Reserved (well known ports)
9999 Telnet setup
14000–14009 Reserved for Redirector
30704 Reserved (77F0h)
30718 Reserved (77FEh)
Use Port 0 for the outgoing local port to change with each connection. The port
range is 50,000 to 59,999. Each subsequent connection increments the
number by 1 (it wraps back around to 50,000).
Only use this automatic port increment feature to initiate a connection using
TCP. Set the port to a non-zero value when the unit is in a passive mode or
when using UDP instead of TCP.
Connect Mode
Connect Mode options entered in hexadecimal format define how the unit
makes a connection, and how it reacts to incoming connections over the
network.
ConnectMode (C0) ?
Connect Mode options are listed in Table 6–7. Note that all bit positions in the
table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which
can be set to a value of 0 or 1.
a) Incoming Connection
b) Response
c) Active Startup
To enable the hostlist:
1. Enter a Connect Mode of 0x20 (2X), where X is any digit. The menu
shows you a list of current entries already defined in the unit.
6–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6–7 Connect Mode options
Connect Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
a) Incoming Connection
Never Accept Incoming 0 0 0
Accept with active Modem Control In 0 1 0
Always Accept (default) 1 1 0
b) Response
Nothing (default) 0
Character Response (C, D or N) 1
c) Active Startup
No Active Startup (default) 0 0 0 0
With Any Character 0 0 0 1
With active Modem Control In 0 0 1 0
With a Specific Start Character 0 0 1 1
Manual Connection 0 1 0 0
Autostart 0 1 0 1
Hostlist 0 0 1 0
d) Datagram Type
Directed UDP 1 1 0 0
e) Modem Mode
No Echo 0 0 1 1
Data Echo & Modem Response (Numeric) 0 1 1 1 1
Data Echo & Modem Response (Verbose) 0 1 1 1 0
Modem Response Only (Numeric) 0 0 1 1 1 1
Modem Response Only (Verbose) 0 0 1 1 1 0
Never Accept Incom- Rejects all external connection attempts.

ing
Accept with active Accepts external connection requests only when the Modem Con-
Modem Control In trol In input is asserted. Cannot be used with Modem Mode.
Always Accept Accepts any incoming connection when a connection is not

(default) already established.
Baudrate (9600) ?
I/F Mode (4C) ?
Flow (00) ?
Port No (10001) ?

Nothing (default) Nothing is transmitted.
Character Response A single character is transmitted to the serial port when there is a
(C, D or N) change in connection state:
C = connected, D = disconnected, N = host unreachable.
The IP address of the host connecting to the port will be provided

when you use verbose mode.
This option is overridden when Active Start Modem Mode or

Active Start Hostlist is in effect.
ConnectMode (C0) ?
Send ‘+++’ in Modem Mode (Y) ?
Auto increment source port (N) ?
Hostlist :
01. IP : 172.019.000.001 Port : 00023
01. IP : 172.019.000.002 Port : 03001
01. IP : 172.019.000.003 Port : 10001
Change Hostlist ? (N) ? _
2. To delete, modify, or add an entry, enter Y.
Change Hostlist ? (N) ? Y

01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(001) Port : (23) ?
01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(002) Port : (3001) ?
01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(003) Port : (10001) ?
3. By entering an IP address of 0.0.0.0, that entry and all others after

it are deleted.
01. IP address : (000) .(000) .(000) .(000)

Hostlist :
01. IP : 172.019.000.001 Port : 00023
01. IP : 172.019.000.002 Port : 03001
01. IP : 172.019.000.003 Port : 10001
Change Hostlist ? (N) ? _
4. After completing the hostlist, repeat the previous step if necessary

to edit the hostlist again. When finished, enter N or press Return.
Change Hostlist ? (N) ? N

Hostlist Retrycounter (3) ?
5. For Retrycounter, enter the number of times the unit should try to
make a good network connection to a hostlist entry that it has
successfully ARPed. The range is 1-15, with the default set to 3.
Hostlist Retrytimeout (250) ?
6. For Retrytimeout, enter the number of seconds the unit should wait
before failing an attempted connection. The time is stored as units
of milliseconds in the range of 1-65535. The default is 250.
6–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

No Active Startup Does not attempt to initiate a connection under any circumstance.
(default)
With Any Character Attempts to connect when any character is received from the
serial port.
With active Modem Attempts to connect when the Modem Control In input changes
Control In from not asserted to asserted.
With a Specific Start Attempts to connect when it receives a specific start character
Character from the serial port. The default start character is carriage return.
Manual Connection Attempts to connect when directed by a command string received

from the serial port. The first character of the command string
must be a C (ASCII 0x43), and the last character must be either a
carriage return (ASCII 0x0D) or a line feed (0x0A). No blanks or
space characters may be in the command string. Between the first
and last command string characters must be a full or partial desti-
nation IP address and may be a destination port number.
The IP address must be in standard decimal-dot notation and may

be a partial address, representing the least significant 1, 2, or 3
bytes of the remote IP address. The period is required between
each pair of IP address numbers.
If present, the port number must follow the IP address, be pre-

sented as a decimal number in the range 1-65535, and be pre-
ceded by a forward slash (ASCII 0x2F). The slash separates the IP
address and the port number. If you omit the port number from a
command string, the internally stored remote port number starts
a connection.
If a partial IP address is presented in a command string, it is

interpreted to be the least significant bytes of the IP address and
uses the internally stored remote IP address to provide the most
significant bytes of the IP address. If the IP address entered is
0.0.0.0/0, the port enters Monitor Mode.
For example, if the remote IP address already configured in the

unit is 129.1.2.3, then an example command string would be
C3/7, which would connect to 129.1.2.3 and port 7. A different
ending for the connection string may also be used. For example,
C50.1/23 would connect to 129.1.50.1 and port 23.
Autostart If Autostart is enabled, the unit automatically connects to the

remote IP address and remote port specified when the port firm-
ware starts.
Hostlist If this option is enabled, the unit scrolls through the hostlist until
it connects to a device listed in the hostlist table. Once it con-
nects, the unit stops trying to connect to any other devices. If this
connection fails, the unit continues to scroll through the table until
it is able to connect to another device in the hostlist.
The hostlist supports a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 12

entries. Each entry contains the IP address and the port number.
The hostlist is disabled for Manual Mode and Modem Mode. The
unit does not accept a data connection from a remote device
when the hostlist option is enabled.

d) Datagram Type
Directed UDP Enter 01 for directed or broadcast UDP. Datagrams of type

01 can be sent as a broadcast by enabling the Send as
Broadcast option. The default is not to broadcast.
When the UDP option is in effect, the unit never attempts

to initiate a TCP connection because it uses UDP datagrams
to send and receive data.
e) Modem Mode
In Modem (Emulation) Mode, the unit presents a modem interface to the
attached serial device. It accepts AT-style modem commands and handles the
modem signals correctly.
To select Modem Mode, set the Connect Mode to C6 (no echo), D6 (echo with
full verbose), D7 (echo with numeric response), CF (modem responses only,
numeric response), or CE (modem responses only, full verbose).
If the unit is in Modem Mode, and the serial port is idle, the unit
can still accept network TCP connections to the serial port if
Connect Mode is set to C6 (no echo), D6 (echo with full
verbose), D7 (echo with numeric response, CF (modem
responses only, numeric response), or CE (modem responses
only, full verbose).
No Echo In Modem Mode, echo refers to the echo of all of the characters
entered in command mode; it does not mean to echo data that is
transferred. Quiet Mode (no echo) refers to the modem not
sending an answer to the commands received (or displaying what
was typed).
Data Echo & Modem The unit echoes modem commands and responds to a command
Response (Numeric) with a numeric response.
Data Echo & Modem The unit echoes modem commands and responds to a command
Response (Verbose) with a message string shown in Table 6–8.
Modem Response The unit does not echo modem commands and responds to a
Only (Numeric) command with a numeric response.
Modem Response The unit does not echo modem commands and responds to a
Only (Verbose) command with a message string shown in Table 6–9.
Received commands must begin with the two-character sequence AT and be

terminated with a carriage return character.
6–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6–8 Modem Mode messages
Message Meaning
Verbose
OK Command was executed without error.
CONNECT A network connection has been established.
NO CARRIER A network connection has been closed.
RING n.n.n.n A remote device, having IP address n.n.n.n, is connecting to this device.
Numeric
0 OK
1 Connected
2 Ring
3 No Carrier
4 Error
Table 6–9 Modem Mode commands
Command Function
ATDTx.x.x.x,pppp or Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and a remote port num-

ATDTx.x.x.x/pppp ber (pppp).
ATDTx.x.x.x:pppp
ATDTx.x.x.x Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and the remote port

number defined within the unit.
ATD0.0.0.0 Forces the unit into Monitor Mode if a remote IP address and port
number are defined within the unit.
ATD Forces the unit into Monitor Mode if a remote IP address and port
number are not defined within the unit.
The unit ignores any character sequence received not starting with AT, and only
recognizes and processes single AT-style commands. The unit treats compound
AT commands as unrecognized commands.
If the Full Verbose option is in effect, the unit responds to an unrecognized
command string that is otherwise formatted correctly (begins with AT and ends
with carriage return) with the "OK" message and takes no further action.
If the Numeric Response option is in effect, the unit responds to an
unrecognized command string that is otherwise formatted correctly with the
"OK" message and takes no further action.
When an active connection is in effect, the unit transfers data and does not
process commands received from the serial interface.
When a connection is terminated or lost, the unit reverts to command mode.

Table 6-9 Modem Mode commands (Continued)
Command Function
ATDx.x.x.x Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and the remote port num-
ber defined within the unit.
ATH Hangs up the connection (entered as +++ATH).
ATS0=n Enables or disables connections from the network going to the serial port.
n=0 disables the ability to make a connection from the network to the
serial port.
n=1-9 enables the ability to make a connection from the network to the
serial port.
n>1-9 is invalid.
ATEn Enables or disables character echo and responses.

n=0 disables character echo and responses.
n=1 enables character echo and responses.
ATVn Enables numeric response or full verbose.

n=0 enables numeric response.
n=1 enables full verbose.
When an active connection is in effect, the unit terminates the connection if it

receives the following sequence from the attached serial device:
• No serial data is received for one second.
• The character sequence +++ is received, with no more than one
second between each two characters.
• No serial data is received for one second after the last + character.
At this time, the unit responds affirmatively per the selected
echo/response mode.
• The character string ATH is received, terminated with a carriage
return. The unit responds affirmatively according to the selected
echo/response mode and drops the network connection. The serial
interface reverts to accepting command strings.
If this sequence is not followed, the unit remains in data transfer mode.
The unit recognizes these AT commands as single commands such

as ATE0 or ATV1; it does not recognize compound commands
such as ATE0V.
Send the Escape Sequence (+++) in Modem Mode

Send ‘+++’ in Modem Mode (Y) ? _
Disable or enable the unit’s ability to send the escape sequence. The default is
Y (Yes), to send the escape sequence.
6–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Show IP addr after 'RING'

Show IP addr after ‘RING’ (Y) ? _
Disable or enable the unit's ability to show the IP address after RING in Modem
Mode. The default is Y (Yes), to show the IP address.
Auto Increment Source Port

Auto increment source port (N) ? _
Y (Yes) auto increments the source port. The unit increments the port number
used with each new connection.
Remote IP Address
This is the destination IP address used with an outgoing connection.
Remote IP Address : (000) (000) (000) (000)_
This option does not display when Hostlist is enabled from the
ConnectMode prompt (see “Connect Mode” on page 6-6 for
more information).
Remote Port
The remote TCP port number for the unit must be set to make outgoing
connections. This parameter defines the port number on the target host to
which a connection is attempted.
Remote Port (0) ? _
To connect an ASCII terminal to a host using the unit for login purposes, use
the remote port number 23 (Internet standard port number for Telnet
services).
This option does not display when Hostlist is enabled from the
ConnectMode prompt (see “Connect Mode” on page 6-6 for
more information).
DisConnMode
Disconnect Mode options entered in hexadecimal format determine the
conditions under which the unit will cause a network connection to terminate.
DisConnMode (00) ?

Disconnect Mode options are listed in Table 6–10. Note that all bit positions
in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option,
which can be set to a value of 0 or 1.
Table 6–10 Disconnect Mode options
Disconnect Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Disconnect when Modem Control In is not 1

asserteda
Ignore Modem Control In 0
Telnet Com Port Cntrl and terminal type 1

setupb
Channel (port) passwordc 1
Hard disconnectd 0
Disable hard disconnect 1
State LED off with connectione 1
Disconnect with EOT (^D)f 1
a. When Modem Control In transitions from a high state to a low state, the network
connection to or from the serial port drops.
b. The Telnet Com Port Control feature is used in conjunction with Com Port Redirector.
The unit sends the Terminal Type upon an outgoing connection.
c. A password is required for a connection to the serial port from the network.
d. The TCP connection closes even if the remote site does not acknowledge the discon-
nection.
e. When there is a network connection to or from the serial port, the State LED turns
off instead of blinking.
f. When Ctrl+D or Hex 04 is detected, the connection is dropped. Both Telnet Com Port
Cntrl and Disconnect with EOT must be enabled for Disconnect with EOT to function
properly. Ctrl+D is only detected going from the serial port to the network.
Flush Mode (Buffer Flushing)

Flush Mode options entered in hexadecimal format control line handling and
network buffers with connection startup and disconnect. Two different packing
algorithms are available.
FlushMode (00) ? _
Flush Mode options are listed in Table 6–11. Note that all bit positions in the
Pack Control
Pack Control settings are enabled in Flush Mode. Set this value to 00 if you
do not need specific functions.
6–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6–11 Flush Mode options
Flush Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input Buffer (Serial to Network)
Clear with a connection initiated from the 1

device to the network

network to the device
Clear when the network connection to or 1

from the device is disconnected
Output Buffer (Network to Serial)

device to the network

network to the device
Clear when the network connection to or 1

from the device is disconnected
Alternate Packing Algorithm (Pack Control)
Enable 1
The packing algorithms define how and when packets are sent to the network.
The standard algorithm is optimized for applications in which the unit is used
in a local environment, allowing for very small delays for single characters,
while keeping the packet count low. The alternate packing algorithm minimizes
the packet count on the network and is especially useful in applications in a
routed Wide Area Network (WAN). Adjusting parameters in this mode can
economize the network data stream.
Pack Control options are listed in Table 6–12. Note that all bit positions in the
Packing Interval
Packing Interval defines how long the unit should wait before sending
accumulated characters. This wait period is between successive network
segments containing data. For alternate packing, the default interval is
12 msec.
Trailing Characters
In some applications, CRC, Checksum, or other trailing characters follow the
end-of-sequence character; this option helps to adapt frame transmission to
the frame boundary.

Table 6–12 Pack Control options
Flush Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packing Interval
Interval=12 msec 0 0
Interval=5 sec 1 1
Trailing Characters
None 0 0
One 0 1
Two 1 0
Send Characters
2-Byte Send Character Sequence 1
Send Immediately After Characters 1
Send Characters
If 2-Byte Send Character Sequence is enabled, the unit interprets the send
characters as a 2-byte sequence; if this option is not enabled, the unit
interprets them independently.
If Send Immediately After Characters is not set, any characters already in
the serial buffer are included in the transmission after a “transmit” condition is
found. If this option is set, the unit sends immediately after recognizing the
transmit condition (sendchar or timeout).
A transmission might occur if status information needs to be

exchanged or an acknowledgment needs to be sent.
DisConnTime (Inactivity Timeout)

Sets the inactivity timeout. The unit drops the connection if there is no activity
on the serial line before the set time expires. Enter time in the format mm:ss,
where “m” is the number of minutes and “s” is the number of seconds.
DisConnTime (00:00) ? _
To disable the inactivity timeout, enter 00:00. Range is 0 (disabled) to 5999

seconds (99 minutes, 59 seconds). The default is 0.
6–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Send Characters
Enter up to two characters in hexadecimal representation.
SendChar 1 (00) ? _
SendChar 2 (00) ? _
If the unit receives a character on the serial line that matches one of these
characters, it sends the character immediately, along with any awaiting
characters, to the TCP connection. This action minimizes the response time for
specific protocol characters on the serial line (for example, ETX, EOT). Setting
the first sendchar to 00 disables the recognition of the characters.
Alternatively, the unit can interpret two characters as a sequence (see “Pack
Control” on page 6-14).
Telnet Terminal Type

This parameter displays only if the terminal type option in Disconnect Mode
is enabled. With the terminal type option enabled, the terminal name for the
Data terminal type can be used. Enter only one name.
With terminal type option enabled, the unit also reacts to the EOR (end of
record) and binary options, useful for applications like terminal emulation to
IBM hosts.
Channel (Port) Password

This parameter displays only if the channel (port) password option is enabled
in Disconnect Mode. With the channel (port) password option enabled, a
password can be set on the serial port.
Expert Settings (Option 5)
Only an expert familiar with the consequences the changes might

have should change these parameters.
TCP Keepalive time in seconds

This option allows you to change how many seconds the unit waits during a
silent connection before attempting to see if the currently connected network
device is still on the network. If the unit gets no response, it drops that
connection.
TCP Keepalive time in s (1s – 65s; 0s=disable): (45)? _

ARP Cache timeout in seconds

Whenever the unit communicates with another device on the network, it adds
an entry into its ARP table. The ARP Cache timeout option allows you to define
how many seconds (1-600) the unit will wait before timing out this table.
ARP Cache timeout in s (1s – 65s; 0s=disable): (600)? _
Disable Monitor Mode at bootup

This option allows you to disable all entries into Monitor Mode during startup,
except for the ‘xxx’ sequence. This prevents entry using yyy, zzz, xx1, and
yy1 key sequences (only during the bootup sequence). The default for
Monitor Mode at bootup is N (No) (see “Monitor Mode” on page 6-21).
Disable Monitor Mode @ bootup (N) ? _
MTU Size
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the largest physical packet size a
network can transmit for TCP and UDP. Enter between 512 and 1400 bytes. The
default is 1400 bytes.
MTU Size: (1400) ? _
Enable alternate MAC

If necessary, enable the alternate MAC address (if specified in the OEM setup
record).
Enable alternate MAC (N) ? _
Ethernet connection type

The XPort Direct allows for the Ethernet speed and duplex to be manually
configured. Enter 0 for auto-negotiation (default). To select the speed and
duplex, enter one of the following: 2 (10Mbit/half duplex), 3 (10Mbit/full
duplex), 4 (100Mbit/half duplex), or 5 (100Mbit/full duplex).
Manually configured speed/duplex settings only work correctly if

the peer or switch also uses a static setting. If the peer is set for
auto negotiation, it will not necessarily result in the correct mode.
This is a common Ethernet problem and is not specific to the
analyzer.
Ethernet connection type: (0) ? _
6–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Security Settings (Option 6)

Security settings can be changed by means of data or serial connections.
SpectraSensors recommends setting security over the dedicated network or
over the serial setup to prevent eavesdropping.
Disabling both Telnet Setup and Port 77FE will prevent users from
accessing the setup menu from the network.
Disable Telnet Setup

This setting defaults to the N (No) option. The Y (Yes) option disables access
to Setup Mode by Telnet (port 9999). It only allows access locally using the
serial port of the unit.
Disable Telnet Setup (N) ? _
Disable TFTP Firmware Upgrade

This setting defaults to the N (No) option. The Y (Yes) option disables the use
of TFTP to perform network firmware upgrades.
Disable TFTP Firmware Update (N) : _
Disable Port 77FE (Hex)
Disabling both Telnet Setup and Port 77FE will prevent users from
accessing the setup menu from the network.
Port 77FE is a setting that allows custom programs to configure the unit
remotely. It may be desirable to disable this capability for security purposes.
Disable Port 77FEh (N) ? _
The default setting is N (No), which enables remote configuration.
Disable ECHO Ports

This setting controls whether port 7 echoes characters it receives.
Disable ECHO ports (Y) ? _
Enable Enhanced Password

This setting defaults to the N (No) option, which allows a four-character
password to be set that protects Setup Mode by means of Telnet. The Y (Yes)

option allows an extended security password of 16 characters to be set for

protecting Telnet access.
Enable Enhanced Password (Y) ? _
Disable Port 77F0 (Hex)

Port 77F0 allows a custom application to query or set the XPort Direct's
configurable pins when they are functioning as general purpose I/O (GPIO).
Disable this capability, if desired, for security purposes.
Disable Port 77F0h ? _
The default setting, the N (No) option, enables GPIO control. The Y (Yes)
option disables the GPIO control interface.
Default Settings (Option 7)

Resets the unit’s Channel 1 configuration and expert settings to the default
settings. The server configuration settings for IP address, gateway IP address,
and netmask remain unchanged. The specific settings that this option changes
are listed in Table 6–13.
Table 6–13 Default settings
Parameter Default Setting
Channel 1 Configuration
Baudrate 9600
I/F Mode 4C (1 stop bit, no parity, 8 bit, RS-232C)
Port Number 10001
Connect Mode C0 (always accept incoming connection; no

active connection startup)
Send '+++' in Modem Mode Enabled
Show IP addr after 'RING' Enabled
Hostlist retry counter 3
Hostlist retry timeout 250 (msec)
Start character for serial channel 1 0x0D (CR)
All other parameters 0
Expert Settings
TCP Keepalive time in s 45
ARP Cache timeout in s 600
Disable Monitor Mode @ bootup No
6–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6-13 Default settings (Continued)
Parameter Default Setting
Expert Settings (Continued)
MTU Size (512 – 1400) 0 (resulting in an operational value of 1400)
Alternate MAC Disabled (for OEM use only)
Ethernet Connection Type 0 (auto-negotiate)
Security Settings
Disable Telnet setup No
Disable TFTP Firmware Update No
Disable Port 77FEh No
Disable ECHO ports Yes
Enable Enhanced password No
Disable Port 77F0h No
Monitor Mode
Monitor Mode is a command line interface used for diagnostic purposes.
Monitor Mode can be accessed using a Telnet connection to configure the port
locally or over the network.
To enter Monitor Mode:

2. Type the following command: telnet 192.168.0.1 9999.
3. Click OK to establish a Telnet connection. The following message
appears:
MAC address 00204A808BE8

Software version V6.3.0.3RC3 (061110)
Press Enter for Setup Mode
4. To enter Monitor Mode, type M (upper case) and press Enter. A 0>
prompt indicates that you have successfully entered Monitor Mode.
Monitor Mode Commands

The commands available in Monitor Mode are listed in Table 6–14. Many
commands have an IP address as an optional parameter (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx). By

entering an IP address, the command will be applied to the unit with that IP
address, otherwise, the command is executed locally.
Table 6–14 Monitor Mode commands
Command Function
VS x.x.x.x Queries software header record (16 bytes) of unit with IP address
x.x.x.x.
GC x.x.x.xx Gets configuration of unit with IP address x.x.x.x as hex records

(120 bytes).
SC x.x.x.x Sets configuration of unit with IP address x.x.x.x from hex

records.
PI x.x.x.x Pings unit with IP address x.x.x.x to check device status.
AT Shows the unit’s ARP table entries.
TT Shows all incoming and outgoing TCP connections.
NC Shows the unit’s IP configuration.
RS Resets the unit’s power.
QU Exits diagnostics mode.
G0, G1, ....,Ge, Gf Gets a memory page of configuration information from the device.
S0, S1,...,Se, Sf Sets a memory page of configuration information on the device.
GM Shows the unit's 6-byte MAC address.
SS Sets the security record without the encryption key and length
parameters. The entire record must still be written, but the
encryption-specific bytes do not need to be provided (they can be
null since they are not overwritten).
SA Initiates a wireless scan if the wireless interface is enabled.

Reports any stations found, including BSSID, SSID, and RSSI. If
SA is followed by a string, the string is used to filter SSIDs before
reporting. If the BSS does not broadcast its SSID, only the BSSID
and RSSI are returned.
NS Reports the network interfaces’ statuses. Includes potentially

negotiated parameters like speed/duplex for Ethernet or encryp-
tion, or BSSID and authentication for wireless interfaces.
Responses to some of the commands are in Intel Hex format.
Entering any of the commands listed in Table 6–14 generates one of the
command response codes listed in Table 6–15.
6–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 6–15 Command response codes
Response Meaning
0> OK; no error
1> No answer from remote device
2> Cannot reach remote device or no answer
8> Wrong parameter(s)
9> Invalid command

6–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

7 - OPERATING THE H2O ANALYZER
The analyzer is designed to be a stationary measuring device. It

should be securely mounted during normal operation.
The laser housing labels on the flanges of the sample cell warn
about exposure to laser radiation inside. Never open the sample
cell unless directed to do so by a service representative and the
analyzer power is turned off.
The optical head has a seal and “WARNING” sticker to prevent

inadvertent tampering with the device. Do not attempt to
compromise the seal of the optical head assembly. Doing so will
result in loss of device sensitivity and inaccurate measurement
data. Repairs can then only be performed by the factory and are
not covered under warranty.
Firmware Version
Each analyzer in a 2-Pack analyzer system operates on its own version of
firmware. The firmware version for each analyzer is listed in the system
calibration report. This chapter for system operation assumes the use of
version v2.50 firmware.
Powering Up the Analyzer

After mounting the analyzer, connecting the power wires, connecting the gas
lines, connecting the (optional) output signal wires, checking for leaks, and
starting up the SCS following the procedure outlined in “Starting up the SCS”
on page 3-3, you are ready to power up the analyzer.
See Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5 for locating fuses. If you need to
! replace a fuse, use only the same type and rating of fuse as the
V A original, as listed in Table 2–2.
To power up the analyzer:

1. Power up the analyzer by energizing the circuit to the analyzer.

2. The analyzer goes through an initialization period counting down

from 14 while showing the firmware version and release date.
Initializing...
14
HC12 v2.50-xxxx
3. After initialization the LCD displays the Normal Mode screen with
four lines (the third of which is blank for single-channel units).
<NORMAL MODE>
H2O: 1.0256ppmv
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F
4. Enable Peak Tracking following the procedure outlined in “To

change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9.
5. Continuous updates of the measurement parameters displaying on
the LCD indicate that the analyzer is operating normally.
Powering Down the Analyzer

It may be necessary to power down the analyzer for problem solving or
maintenance reasons. An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps
should have been installed and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for
the analyzer.
To power down the analyzer:

1. Switch off the power to the analyzer using the switch or circuit
breaker designated as the disconnection device for the equipment.
2. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a short period of time for
routine maintenance, isolate the analyzer from the SCS by following
the procedure under “To isolate the SCS for short-term
3. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a long period of time,
follow the procedure under “To isolate the process sample tap
for long-term shutdown” on page 3-8. It is recommended to also
disconnect the power completely from the analyzer to prevent
potential damage from lightning strikes.
7–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Operating the H2O Analyzer
Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad

The keypad enables the operator to modify measurement units, adjust
operational parameters and perform diagnostics. During normal operation, the
LCD continuously displays the measured components’ concentrations, sample
cell temperatures, and sample cell pressures.
The SpectraSensors keypad is shown in Figure 7–1. To activate any functions
on the keypad, press the mode key # followed by a number on the keypad to
specify a mode.
Figure 7–1 H2O analyzer keypad (v2.50 Firmware)
When you press the # key, the word MODE displays on the LCD. At this point,
the analyzer waits for you to press a second key.
You must press the # key before pressing a number or function

key to trigger a response from the keypad.
Mode 2 sets the parameters in the system. In this mode, the * key functions
as the “enter” key. The analyzer saves the displayed parameter value when you
press this key. Always press * after entering a value on the keypad (unless the
entry was made in error).
If you do make an error, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to
Mode 1 without saving.

Modes Defined
Use the keypad to access the following modes by pressing the key # key first
followed by a number (1, 2, 4, 6 or 7) to activate a mode. The following section
explains each mode and the corresponding information that displays on the
LCD.
Mode 1: (Normal Display)

Mode 1 continuously displays updated measurements. Press the # key
# + 1
<NORMAL MODE>
H2O: 1.0256ppmv
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

• H2O: Concentration of analyte/component in the sample cell (in
units) that is selected in Mode 2.
• P: Pressure in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.
• T: Temperature in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.
Mode 2: (Change Parameters)

Mode 2 enables the user to view and change measurement parameters. Press
the # key followed by the 2 key.
# + 2

Enter password
HC12 v2.50-xxxx
The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on
the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number. The following is
displayed on the LCD.
7–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Main Matrix
0
0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D
Follow the procedure under “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9
for viewing and changing any of the parameters.
Mode 3: (Not Used)
Mode 4: (Diagnostic Parameters)

Mode 4 displays system diagnostic data. These values may be useful when
troubleshooting the system. Press the # key followed by the 4 key.
# + 4
PP2F:8190 PkDf:34.00
Powr:2538 PkD1:34.00
Indx: 301
Zero: -24
Mode 5: (Not Used)
Mode 6: (Export Diagnostic Data)

Used to transfer diagnostic data to the serial port and read the individual data
points of both the DC and 2f spectra that the instrument analyzes to calculate
the gas concentration. Viewing these data can be helpful in diagnosing
problems with the analyzer. Press # key followed by the 6 key.
# + 6
The data points, along with intermediate calculation results, are output to the
serial port(s) whenever Mode 6 is selected.

Mode 7: (Validation Measurements)

Mode 7 is used to set the system for validation measurement. The settings for
this mode are controlled by the Validation Matrix parameter. Press the # key
# + 7
<NORMAL MODE>
H2O: 4.0256ppmv (V)
P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F
While the system is in validation mode, (V) will display to the right of the
analyte type on the LCD. Refer to “Validating the Analyzer” on page 7-21
for instructions on performing a manual validation measurement.
Mode 8: (Not Used)
Mode TEST: (System Test)

Provides basic diagnostic test results indicating that the laser power,
pressure/temperature sensors, and the infrared spectrum that the system
records for analysis are all nominal. Press the # key followed by the TEST key.
# + TEST
The LCD displays the system test data.
<SYSTEM TEST>
Laser Power: OK
PT Sen: OK Trak: OK
Spectr: OK Null: OK
For viewing the data, press the 1 key followed by the * key.
<H2O SYSTEM TEST>

Laser Power: OK
PT Sen: OK Trak: OK
Spectr: OK Null: OK
7–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Changing Measurement and Control Parameters

In Mode 2, all of the pertinent measurement and control parameters can be
viewed and changed. Refer to Table 7–1 for a list of parameters and value
ranges. The parameters are listed in the order viewed during Mode 2
operation.
Table 7–1 Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer]

Main Matrix 0, 1, 2, 3 Sets the calibration matrix (A, B, C,
D) that is used when Mode 1 is
pressed
Validation Matrix 0, 1, 2, 3 Sets the calibration matrix (A, B, C,
D) that is used when Mode 7 (H2O)
or Mode 8 (H2O) is pressed
S Factor User Set Analyzer response adjustment to

-99 – 99 match calibration standard in the
Default = 1 field.
S Factor Offset User Set Analyzer offset adjustment to
-999999 – 999999 match calibration standard in the
Default = 0 field.
# Spectrum Average 1 – 240 Sets the number of scans averaged
Default = 4 for each measurement
Logger Rate 1 – 300 readings Sets the number of measurements
Default = 4 to include in a running average
Peak Tracking 0, 1, 2 Sets peak tracking capability to off,
on, or reset
DO Alarm Delay User Set Sets the number of consecutive
0 – 30000 readings concentration must be
Default = 0 above setpoint before triggering a
High Concentration Alarm
Low Power Warning User Set Sets the DC power level below
200 – 4999 which the analyzer will issue a Low
Default = 200 Power Warning
DO Alarm Setup 0 – 8 or 100 – 108 Sets the functionality of the second-
ary digital output (if applicable)
Alarm Setpoint 0 – 999999 Sets the threshold for the High (or
Low) Concentration Alarm
4-20 mA Alarm Action 0, 1, 2 or 3 Sets the current loop state upon
alarm condition

Table 7-1 Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer] (Continued)

4-20 mA % Test 0 – 101 Sets the 4-20 mA output to a per-
centage of full scale
4 mA Value 0 – 999999 Sets the ppmv value that will corre-
spond to 4 mA
20 mA Value 0 – 999999 Sets the ppmv value that will corre-
spond to 20 mA
Temperature Unit 0 or 1 Sets the display unit for tempera-
ture
Pressure Unit 0, 1, 2, or 3 Sets the display unit for pressure
Concentration Unit 0, 1 or 2 Sets the display unit for concentra-
tion
Concen Unit Convert 0-999999 Sets a custom conversion multi-
plier for the Concentration Unit.
Zero uses the default conversion.
Pipeline Pressure 0 – 999999 Sets pipeline pressure used to cal-
culate dew point
4-20 mA Value Action 0 or 1 Sets the behavior of the analog out-
put when the analyzer is in Valida-
tion Measurement Mode.
Modbus Address User Set Sets Modbus address for the ana-
0 – 250 lyzer
Modbus Mode User Set Sets type of Modbus protocol
0, 1, or 2
Analyzer ID User Set Customer definable value for ana-
0 – 2147483647 lyzer ID
Sample ID User Set Customer definable value for sam-
0 – 2147483647 ple ID
Component ID User Set Customer definable value for com-
0 – 2147483647 ponent (analyte) ID
User Password 0 – 9999 Sets Level 1 access password
Default = 3142
7–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

To change parameters in Mode 2:

1. Press the # key followed by the 2 (Mode 2) key.

Enter password
HC12 v2.50-xxxx
The LCD prompts for a numeric password.

2. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key
to enter the number. The following displays on the LCD.

Main Matrix
0
0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D
3. Starting with the first parameter, enter a new value and/or press the
* key to store the value and cycle to the next parameter.
4. When finished changing or viewing the measurement and control
parameters, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode
1 and normal operation.
Measurement and Control Parameters Defined

The following section defines the measurement and control parameters set in
the system. The parameters are shown in alphabetical order for easy reference.
Refer to Table 7–1 on page 7–7 to review the parameter order listed during
Mode 2 configuration.
# Spectrum Average
The # Spectrum Average parameter sets the number of scans that the
analyzer averages when determining concentration. Averaging over multiple
scans lowers noise in the measurement, but inherently increases response
time. Each scan adds about 0.25 seconds to the response time. For example,
if # Spectrum Average is set to “4,” an updated concentration value will be
calculated about once every second.

# Spectrum Average
16
Enter a value


The 4-20 mA Alarm Action parameter determines the current loop state
upon an alarm condition. Enter 0 (low) for the current loop to assume a low
state (4 mA), 1 (high) for the current loop to assume a high state (20 mA), 2
(track and hold) for the current loop to hold the last valid measurement value,
or 3 (no control) for the current loop to continue to track the concentration
value upon an alarm condition.

0
0:L 1:H 2:T&H 3:None
4-20 mA % Test
The 4-20 mA % Test parameter enables control of the current loop output for
testing and calibration purposes. The value entered represents a percent of
scale value where zero equals 4 mA and full scale equals 20 mA. Thus, the
current loop output, i, is given by
i = R ( 20 mA – 4 mA ) + 4 mA ,
where R is the 4-20 mA % Test parameter value. Entering 101 turns off the
control of the current loop and returns to the current loop output tracking the
concentration value.

4-20 mA % Test
101
Enter a % (101=Off)
After setting the desired value, press # Mode and 1 to initiate control of the
current loop to the value entered.
4-20 mA Val Action

The 4-20 mA Val Action parameter sets the behavior of the analog output signal
while the analyzer is in Validation Measurement Mode. If 0 is chosen, the
analog output will stay at the last known value while the analyzer is in
7–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Validation Measurement Mode. If 1 is chosen, the analyzer will update the

analog output with the Validation Measurement Mode values.

4-20mA Val Action
0
0:Hold 1:Measure
4 mA Value
The 4 mA Value parameter sets the concentration value [in ppmv or dew-
point temperature (in temperature units selected with the Temperature Unit
parameter)] that corresponds to 4 mA on the current loop output. Typically this
will be 0.000.

4 mA Value
0.00000
20 mA Value
The 20 mA Value parameter sets the concentration value [in ppmv or dew
point temperature units selected with the Temperature Unit parameter)] that
corresponds to 20 mA on the current loop output. Typically this will be the full-
scale value for which the analyzer was calibrated.

20 mA Value
100.000
Analyzer ID
The Analyzer ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data
enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate data with a particular analyzer.

Analyzer ID
0
Enter a value

Component ID
The Component ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data
enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate the data with a particular
analyte/component.

Component ID
0
Enter a value
Concen Unit Convert

The Concen Unit Convert parameter allows a custom conversion multiplier to
be used instead of the analyzer default conversion for the Concentration Unit.
On moisture system, this custom conversion does not apply if dew point is
chosen as the Concentration Unit.

Concen Unit Convert
0.000
0:Off >0:Multiplier
Concentration Unit
The Concentration Unit parameter designates the display units for the
measured concentration. For percentage level analyzers (non-H2O):
• 0 for ppmv
• 1 for %
• 2 for mg/sm3

Concentration Unit
0
0:ppm 1:lb 2:DP 3:mg
7–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

DO Alarm Delay
The DO Alarm Delay parameter sets the number of measurements to delay
the high concentration alarm before it becomes active.

DO Alarm Delay
4
Enter a value
DO Alarm Setup
The DO Alarm Setup parameter sets the functionality of the secondary digital
output.

DO Alarm Setup
1
Enter a value
Enter the value corresponding to the desired functionality according to

Table 7–2.
Table 7–2 Secondary digital output functionality
Setting Functionality
0 Always Activated
1 High Concentration Alarm
Normally Energized
2 Low Concentration Alarm

3 Power Fail Error
4 PT Fail Error
5 Spectrum Fail Error
6 Null Fail Error
7 Track Fail Error
8 Power Warning

Table 7-2 Secondary digital output functionality (Continued)
Setting Functionality
100 Always Deactivated
Normally Deenergized
101 High Concentration Alarm
102 Low Concentration Alarm
103 Power Fail Error
104 PT Fail Error
105 Spectrum Fail Error
106 Null Fail Error
107 Track Fail Error
108 Power Warning
Option 0 is intended to be used as a power failure alarm for the

analyzer for AC or DC power only. If selected while the analyzer
is on, the relay will also be on. If the analyzer loses power, the
relay will turn off.
Logger Rate
For applications where an external data logger is employed, use the logging
rate to set the number of measurements to include in the running average. The
display and the current loop output will each have a value representing the
running average of the concentration over a number of measurements equal to
Logger Rate.

Logger Rate
4
Enter a value
7–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Low Power Warning

The Low Power Warning parameter sets the level at which the analyzer will
issue a Low Power Warning.

Low Power Warning
200
Enter a value
Main Matrix
On some systems, more than one calibration is needed to handle multiple
analyte ranges or background variations. Up to four calibrations matrices can
be loaded into the analyzer each using a letter designation (A, B, C or D). The
Main Matrix parameter sets the active calibration matrix when Mode 1 is
pressed.

Main Matrix
0
0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D
Modbus Address
The Modbus Address parameter sets the analyzer address for when the
analyzer is used as a Modbus device. Addresses from 1 to 250 can be used.

Modbus Address
1
Enter a value(1-250)
Modbus Mode
The Modbus Mode parameter sets the communications protocol for the RS-
232 port. There are three choices: 0 for turning the Modbus capabilities off and
defaulting to generic serial output as described in “Receiving Serial Data
(Customer Port Output)” on page 8-1; 1 for enabling the analyzer to

respond to Gould Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16; and 2 for enabling
the analyzer to respond to Daniel Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16.

Modbus Mode
0
0:Off 1:GMR 2:DMR
Peak Tracking
The peak tracking function is a software utility that continuously adjusts the
laser current to keep the absorption peak of the measured component at the
center of the scan. There are three choices: 0 for no peak tracking, 1 for peak
tracking (default), or 2 to reset the peak tracking function. In most cases, the
peak tracking should be left on (i.e., Peak Tracking set to 1).

Peak Tracking
1
0:Off 1:Track 2:Rst
Pressure Unit
The Pressure Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured
absolute pressure in the cell. There are four choices: 0 for millibar, 1 for Torr,
2 for kPa, and 3 for psia.

Pressure Unit
0:mb1:Torr2:Pa3:psi
Sample ID
The Sample ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data
enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate the data with a particular sample
point.

Sample ID
0
Enter a value
7–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

S Factor
The S Factor parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment
(without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response (or slope)
in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

S Factor
1.00000
Enter a value
S Factor Offset
The S Factor Offset parameter is a user definable value that enables
adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in
the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

S Factor Offset
0.00000
Enter a value (ppmv)
Temperature Unit
The Temperature Unit parameter designates the display units for the
measured cell temperature. There are two choices: 0 for degrees Celsius and
1 for Fahrenheit. The default value is the standard unit of measurement in the
region the analyzer is being used.

Temperature Unit
0
0:C 1:F

User Password
The User Password parameter sets the Level 1 access password. The default
password is 3142.

User Password
3142
Enter password
Validation Matrix
On some systems, more than one calibration is needed to handle multiple
analyte ranges or background variations. Up to four calibrations matrices can
be loaded into the analyzer each using a letter designation (A, B, C or D). The
Validation Matrix parameter sets the active calibration matrix that is used when
Mode 7 is pressed.

Validation Matrix
0
0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D
Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific

Standard(s)
In some instances, the user may wish to adjust the analyzer reading to match
the concentration (or concentrations) of a specific standard (or standards). The
S Factor and S Factor Offset parameters are used to adjust the analyzer
output in the field without affecting the factory calibration. Both parameters are
used when samples from two different concentration standards are available,
whereas only the S Factor Offset parameter is used when a sample from only
one concentration standard is available.
The value of the S Factor parameter, S, is determined by
C2 – C1
- ,
S = -------------------
A2 – A1
where C1 is the certified concentration of standard No. 1, C2 is the certified
concentration of standard No. 2, A1 is the measured concentration (analyzer
reading) of standard No. 1, and A2 is the measured concentration (analyzer
reading) of standard No. 2.
7–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

The S Factor Offset parameter, O, is determined by
O = C1 – ( S ⋅ A1 ) ,
where S = 1 when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.
To adjust the analyzer reading:

1. Validate the analyzer using one or two concentration standards [see
“Validating the Analyzer” on page 7-21].

the analyte/component mixed in the validation gas specified on
the analyzer calibration report. Bottles of test gas with certified
concentrations of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are
recommended for two point validation. For single point validation,
a bottle with a certified concentration of approximately 50% of full
scale should be used.

2. Calculate the S Factor and/or S Factor Offset parameter(s) using

the equations above.
3. Follow the procedure under “To change parameters in Mode 2”
on page 7-9 to enter the new values.
4. Confirm the new values by re-measuring the bottle(s) of test gas.
Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal

The 4-20 mA current loop signal is most conveniently scaled and calibrated at
the receiving end (RTU, flow computer, etc.).
The 4-20 mA current loop is factory set as the source unless

otherwise specified. Contact your sales representative if a change
is required.

To scale the receiver’s output, the analyzer’s current loop output is set to 4 mA
and 20 mA and the receiver is adjusted to read “0” and “Full Scale,”
respectively.
Be sure to work in a non-hazardous area while handling any

electrical connector.
To scale the current loop signal:

1. Make sure the current loop to be adjusted is connected and the
receiver is set for the 4-20 mA board to source the current.
2. Set the current loop output to 4 mA by setting the 4-20 mA % Test
parameter to zero (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on
page 7-9).
The current loop output of 4 mA corresponds to the concentration
value set by the 4 mA Value parameter.
4. Set the current loop output to 20 mA by setting the 4-20 mA %
Test parameter to 100.
The current loop output of 20 mA corresponds to the concentration
value set by the 20 mA Value parameter.
6. If desired, repeat by setting the 4-20 mA % Test parameter, R, to
any value between 0 and 100 and confirm that the output, i, agrees
with i = R ( 20 mA – 4 mA ) + 4 mA .
7. When finished, reset the 4-20 mA % Test parameter to 101.
Warnings
• Low Power Warning: This warning occurs when the DC signal
drops below the level set by the Low Power Warning parameter.
Faults/Alarms
The High Concentration Alarm or Low Concentration Alarm is triggered
when the measured concentration is above or below, respectively, the level set
in Mode 2. The General Fault Alarm is triggered by system faults that also
cause the current loop to respond according to the 4-20 mA Alarm Action
setting. The particular fault is indicated by a message on the front panel LCD.
System faults include one or more of the following:
• Power Fail Error: This fault occurs when the DC signal becomes too
weak for a reliable measurement typically as a result of mirror
contamination.
7–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Null Fail Error: This fault occurs if the detector signal value is out of
the range of -50 to +50 when the laser is turned off.
• Spectrum Fail Error: This fault occurs when the system is unable
to adequately fit a curve to the measured signal, typically as a result
of DC signal saturation in the absence of absorbing gas in the
measurement cell, too much noise in the signal or an unexpected gas
mixture in the measurement cell.
• PT Fail Error: This fault occurs when the pressure and/or
temperature in the measurement cell exceeds the specified
maximum operating levels.
• Track Fail Error: This fault occurs when the peak tracking function
is out of range [PkDf (factory set midpoint) and PkD1 (peak track
midpoint) differ by more than 4 counts].
Alarm and fault messages appear on the front panel LCD. See Appendix B for
recommendations and solutions to common problems resulting in a system
fault.
Validating the Analyzer

Validation of the analyzer using an appropriate gas standard can be done
manually on systems equipped with a check gas or validation gas port.
To validate manually (if applicable):

1. Connect a bottle of validation gas to the check gas or validation gas
port (at the specified supply pressure).
2. Press #(Mode) 7 to set the validation measurement mode.
When the validation mode is enabled through Mode 7, “(V)” will

be displayed to the right of the designated analyte type on the
LCD.
3. Close the upstream measurement cell isolation valve.

4. Open the check gas or validation gas shut-off valve.
5. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valve to the specified flow for
the measurement cell.
The adjustment setpoints of the analyzer flowmeters and

pressure regulators will be interactive and may require
readjustment multiple times until the final setpoints are obtained.

The analyzer system has been designed for the sample flow rate
specified. A lower than specified sample flow rate may adversely
affect system performance. If you are unable to attain the
specified sample flow rate, contact your factory sales
representative.
6. Make a measurement after the gas flows for approximately five

minutes or when the values on the LCDs settle.
7. After validation, press #(Mode) 1 to return to normal mode.
8. Close the check gas or validation gas shut-off valve.
9. Open the upstream measurement cell isolation valve.
10. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valve to the specified flow for
the measurement cell, and to return to normal operation.

calibration report. Bottles of test gas with certified concentrations
of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are recommended for
two point validation. For single point validation, a bottle with a
certified concentration of approximately 50% of full scale should
be used.

Calibrating the Analyzer

Calibrating the analyzer is typically not required under normal circumstances.
SpectraSensors calibrates each analyzer to a National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) traceable standard before shipping the unit to the end
user. Because SpectraSensors analyzers use a non-contact form of
measurement, they are relatively insensitive to contamination, are quite
rugged and virtually maintenance free ensuring years of reliable service.
7–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

8 - FIRMWARE V2.50 SERIAL PORT
COMMUNICATIONS
Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)

When the Modbus Mode parameter is set to 0, the analyzer is configured to
transfer a string of data from the analyzer to a serial device via the RS-232
output. The receiving device is typically a computer terminal running
HyperTerminal, which is a program included with Microsoft® Windows® 95, 98,
and XP that enables serial communication and the viewing, capturing and
storage of serial port data and messages.
To launch HyperTerminal:
2. Type Hypertrm.exe and hit Return to launch HyperTerminal.
For faster access to HyperTerminal, save a HyperTerminal

shortcut to the desktop.
3. Once HyperTerminal is activated, the Connection Description

window appears, as shown in Figure 8–1. Type in a Filename
(where the terminal session settings will be stored for future recall)
and click on any icon. Click OK.
4. The Connect To window appears prompting for a connection, as
shown in Figure 8–2. Click the Menu Arrow under Connect Using
to view the choices.
5. Click on the appropriate port to which your analyzer is connected
(COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.) as established under “Connecting the
Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15. Click OK.
6. Once the port is chosen, the COM Properties window appears.
Make sure the COM properties for the port selected reflect those
shown in Figure 8–3 (9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity,
and no flow control).
7. Click OK to establish the connection.
Once connected, the data will start streaming through the Hyperterminal
Window as shown in Figure 8–4.

Figure 8–1 Connection Description window (v2.50)
Figure 8–2 Connect To window (v2.50)
8–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Firmware v2.50 Serial Port Communications
Figure 8–3 COM Properties window (v2.50)
Figure 8–4 Hyperterminal window with streaming

data (v2.50)

The data string is comma and space delimited with a carriage return and
includes:
• Concentration: Analyte concentration (user selected units)
• Pressure: Cell pressure (user selected units)
• Temperature: Cell temperature (user selected units)
• PP2F: Magnitude of concentration signal (counts)
• Powr: DC signal at absorption peak (counts)
• Indx: Position of absorption peak in scan
• Zero: Detected signal with laser turned off (counts)
• PkD1: Present midpoint value (mA)
The number of seconds between each line of data output should

be the # Spectrum Average number set in Mode 2 or Mode 3
divided by 4.
To capture and save data from the serial port:

2. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture
Text/Stop.
To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal:

1. Before entering Mode 6, make sure the serial port on the computer
used for serial communication is connected to the analyzer and the
output stream is showing on the screen as described in “To launch
HyperTerminal” on page 8-1.
8–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

3. Once capturing is in place, enter Mode 6 by pressing # key followed

by the 6 key.
# + 6

Index: 0
The index shown on the LCD display counts by 50’s from 0 to 511 in
a few seconds. The analyzer will continue to dump Mode 6 data until
instructed to stop. The screen above will repeat itself for each data
dump. Once sufficient data has been captured, press the “MODE”
key at any time to discontinue.
When the analyzer completes the current dump, the following screen
displays:
MODE
4. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.

5. Once normal operation resumes, allow appropriate time for data
streaming, then stop the capture of the serial data. To stop the
capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture Text/Stop.
The resulting data files contain the downloaded data as shown in
Figure 8–5.
To import the stored data file into a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft
Excel® to plot the data, refer to “Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft
Excel” for instructions.
Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft Excel

A spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel can import the data collected
in the Mode 6 data dump for viewing and plotting.
To import the data file into Excel:

1. In Excel, click Open and choose the name of the spectrum file saved
while in Mode 6. Be sure to select All Files (*.*) under Files of
type: while searching, as shown in Figure 8–6.

211.6678, 0.0000, 1006.9, 24.98, 2154, 2078, 340, -10, 60.00

211.1581, 0.0000, 1006.6, 24.98, 2137, 2078, 340, -9, 60.00
210.6408, 0.0000, 1007.6, 24.98, 2128, 2078, 340, -10, 60.00
HC12 v2.50-B525 H2O Single
Current Mode: Main Stream

Current File: 0 (0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D)
Settings
Phase: 300
Midpoint: 60.0000
Ramp amplitude: 35.0000
Imod: 8.000
Rcalb: (A)4.000000E+01 (B)4.000000E+01 (C)4.000000E+01 (D)4.000000E+01
Zero Offset (ppmv): (A)0.000000E+00 (B)0.000000E+00 (C)0.000000E+00 (D)0.000000E+00
Min Range (ppmv): 0.000
Max Range (ppmv): 422.00
Min Pressure (mbar): 700
Max Pressure (mbar): 1700
P a1 Coeff: (A)1.000E+00 (B)1.000E+00 (C)1.000E+00 (D)1.000E+00
NL a0 Coeff: (A)0.00000E+00 (B)0.00000E+00 (C)0.00000E+00 (D)0.00000E+00
Xleftvmr: 240
Xrightvmr: 340
Null Fail Range Min: -50
Null Fail Range Max: 50
Peak Track Num Avgs: 3600
Serial Number: 100000000
Main Matrix: 0
Validation Matrix: 0
S Factor: 1.00000
S Factor Offset: 0.00000
# Spectrum Average: 4
Logger Rate: 4
Peak Tracking: 0
DO Alarm Delay: 0
Low Power Warning: 200
DO Alarm Setup: 0
Alarm Setpoint(ppmv): 430.0
4-20mA Alarm Action: 0
4-20mA % Test: 101
4 mA Value: 0.000
20 mA Value: 422.000
Temperature Unit: 0
Pressure Unit: 0
Concentration Unit: 0
Concen Unit Convert: 0.000
Pipeline Pressure: 0.00
4-20 mA Val Action : 0
Figure 8–5 Sample Mode 6 data output (v2.50)
8–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Modbus Address: 1
Modbus Mode: 0
User Analyzer ID: 0
User Sample ID: 0
User Component ID: 0
Peak Index Location: 290

mA Index Scale: 0.06835938
Peak Track Range Min: 3
Peak Track Range Max: 70
Constants
Null Point: 6
SpectraSensors HardHat
IdxDCAC
0 3157 -325
1 2679 -269
2 1992 -264
3 1348 -254
4 844 -238
5 490 -218
6 263 -197
7 125 -176
8 49 -156
9 11 -138
10 -4 -120
11 -10 -104
12 -10 -90
13 10 -125
14 65 257
15 114 982
16 145 1573
17 156 1917
18 158 2325
19 156 2957
20 157 3604
21 161 4095
22 165 4095
23 171 4095
24 178 4095
25 184 4095
26 191 4095
27 197 4095
28 203 4095
29 208 4095
30 214 4095
31 219 4095
32 225 4095
33 229 4095
34 235 4095
35 239 4095
36 244 4095
37 250 4095
38 254 4095
39 260 4095
40 264 4095
41 270 4095
42 274 4095
43 278 4095
Figure 8-5 Sample diagnostic data output [v2.50] (Continued)

Figure 8–6 Opening a data file in Excel
2. The Text Import Wizard should open. Choose the Delimited

option and click Next, as shown in Figure 8–7.
Figure 8–7 Setting data type in Text Import Wizard
3. Under Delimiters, choose the Tab and Comma options, check the
Treat Consecutive Delimiters as One box, as shown in Figure
8–8, and then click Finish to display the spreadsheet.
The first few lines look like the normal serial output data received
8–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Figure 8–8 Setting Tab and Comma as delimiters
before the Mode 6 command was entered. Look for the three
columns of numbers, as shown in Figure 8–9.
Figure 8–9 Highlighting imported data for plotting

in Excel
4. Click on the upper left cell with the “Idx” header, as shown in Figure
8–9. Hold the Shift key down while pressing the Control key
followed by the Right Arrow key to highlight all three columns in

the row. Hold the Shift and Control key down again and press the
Down Arrow key to highlight all 512 rows.
5. Click the Chart Wizard button on the Task Bar. The Chart
Wizard opens, as shown in Figure 8–10.
Figure 8–10 Chart Wizard - Step 1 window
6. Choose the X-Y (Scatter) chart type and the Smoothed Lines
Without Markers sub-type. Click Finish to display a graph of the
spectrum, as shown in Figure 8–11.
3000 250
2500 200
2000 150
100
1500 Series1
50
1000 Series2
0
500 -50
0 -100
-500 0 200 400 600-150
Figure 8–11 Data file plot in Excel
If the 2f curve appears flat, double click on it to get to the Format

Data Series Window. Select the Axis tab, and select Plot Series
8–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

on Secondary Axis, as shown in Figure 8–12. Click OK to rescale

the plot.
Figure 8–12 Format Data Series window
Modbus Communications Protocol

Modbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for
use with its programmable logic controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto
standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly
available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. Modbus is used
extensively in lieu of other communications protocols because it is openly
published and royalty-free, relatively easy to deploy, and capable of moving
raw bits or words without placing many restrictions on vendors.
Modbus enables communication between many devices connected to the same
network, for example, a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit
(RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.
The SpectraSensors analyzer acts as a slave in a master/slave(s) network of
devices. It can receive queries from a master and send responses back using
either Gould Modbus RTU protocol or Daniel Extended Modbus RTU protocol.
Framing/Protocol
The transmission mode used to communicate is either Gould Modbus RTU or
Daniel Modbus RTU with port parameters 9600 (baud rate), 8 (data bits), 1
(stop bit), no (parity), and none (flow control/handshake).

The Modbus option is determined by the user via a front-panel configuration

parameter as follows:
• Set Modbus Mode = 0 to disable Modbus mode and to enable the
Generic Serial mode
• Set Modbus Mode = 1 to enable Gould Modbus RTU mode
• Set Modbus Mode = 2 to enable Daniel Modbus RTU mode
The generic serial output (HyperTerminal) is disabled if either

Gould or Daniel Modbus is selected.
Functions
Available functions are 0x03 (read holding registers), 0x06 (write to a single
register), 0x10 (write to multiple registers), and 0x2B (read device
identification).
Addressing
The analyzer's Modbus slave node address can be in the range of 0-250 with
the default being 1. All analyzers will respond to an address of 0, so this
address can be used to interrogate a single unit when its address is unknown
or to determine its address.
See Table 8–1 on page 8–15 for register definitions for both Gould and Daniel
Modbus modes. Be aware that for Gould Modbus the table follows the
convention of identifying the register with an offset of 40001. Therefore, the
actual value transmitted in the starting register field of the command is the
listed register value minus 40001, e.g., register 47001 is addressed as 7000.
Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode

Daniel Modbus supports three types of registers: short integer, long integer and
floating point. Each “short integer” register is two bytes in length and will
contain an integer value. Each “long integer” register is four bytes in length and
will contain an integer value and each “floating point” register is four bytes in
length and will contain a floating point value.
Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode

Gould Modbus supports three types of variable data, short integer, long integer
and floating point, but all registers are addressed as word (two byte) registers.
A “short integer” value is contained in one register whereas a “long integer” or
8–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

“floating point” value requires two contiguous registers. The registers are
defined as Read or Read/Write.
Use caution when writing to registers as changing the value of a

writable register may affect the calibration of the analyzer.
An appropriate password must be downloaded to the password register prior

to writing to most registers. The User Level 1 (L1) user password 3142 will
allow access to those registers which have been pre-defined as user
configurable. Other writable registers can only be downloaded or changed by
SpectraSensors support personnel using a User Level 2 (L2) password.
Endianness
Endianness, often referred to as byte order, is the ordering of individually
addressable sub-units (words, bytes, or even bits) within a longer data word.
Byte orders with the most versus least significant byte first are called big-
endian and little-endian, respectively. In SpectraSensors analyzers, all bytes
are stores big-endian. Thus, for floating point and long-integer data types, the
byte order will look like:
HighWord-HighByte HighWord-LowByte LowWord-HighByte LowWord-LowByte
Note that floating point values follow the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point
Arithmetic (IEEE 754-2008).
To enable Modbus communications:

1. Confirm that the serial cable has been properly connected. See
“Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15.
2. Power up the analyzer (see “Powering Up the Analyzer” on page
7-1).

Enter password
HC12 v2.50-xxxx
(3142) on the keypad and the following displays on the LCD.


Main Matrix
0
0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D
Press the * key to enter the number to enter Mode 3 (Set Parameter Mode).
4. Press the * key repeatedly until the Modbus Address parameter is
displayed.

Modbus Address
1
Enter a value(1-250)
5. Enter the desired Modbus Address and press the * key to store the
value and cycle to the Modbus Mode parameter.

Modbus Mode
0
0:Off 1:GMR 2:DMR
6. Enter the desired Modbus Mode and press the * key to store the
value.
7. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.The
analyzer is now ready to receive Modbus queries.
8–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 8–1 Modbus register map [v2.50]
Daniel Gould Data

Parameter Action Min Max
Reg. Reg. Type
Concentration 7001 47001 Float Read 0 0
Temperature 7002 47003 Float Read 0 0
Pressure 7003 47005 Float Read 0 0
Supply Voltage (DC) 7004 47007 Float Read 0 0
PkD1 (Current Midpoint) 7005 47009 Float Read 0 0
Firmware Version 7057 47113 Float Read 0 0
S Factor 7101 47201 Float R/W L1a -99 99
S Factor Offset (ppmv) 7102 47203 Float R/W L1a -999999 999999
Alarm Setpoint (ppmv, 7103 47205 Float R/W L1 0 999999

lb or %)
Pipeline Pressure (mb) 7104 47207 Float R/W L1a 0 9999.9
4 mA Value (ppmv) 7105 47209 Float R/W L1a 0 999999
20 mA Value 7106 47211 Float R/W L1a 0 999999
Concen Unit Convert 7107 47213 Float R/W L1 0 999999
Alarm Flags 5001 45001 Long Read 0 0
Analyzer ID 5101 45201 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9
Sample ID 5102 45203 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9
Component ID 5103 45205 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9
PP2f 3001 43001 Integer Read 0 0
Power 3002 43002 Integer Read 0 0
Index 3003 43003 Integer Read 0 0
Zero 3004 43004 Integer Read 0 0
# Spectrum Average 3201 43201 Integer R/W L1a 1 240
Logger Rate 3202 43202 Integer R/W L1a 1 299
Peak Tracking 3203 43203 Integer R/W L1a 0 2
4-20 mA Alarm Action 3204 43204 Integer R/W L1a 0 3
Temperature Unit 3205 43205 Integer R/W L1a 0 1
Pressure Unit 3206 43206 Integer R/W L1a 0 3
Concentration Unit 3207 43207 Integer R/W L1a 0 2
Modbus Device Address 3208 43208 Integer R/W L1a 0 250
a. Write privilege requires User Level 1 (L1) password to be downloaded to the Pass-
word register.

Table 8-1 Modbus register map [v2.50] (Continued)
Daniel Gould Data

Parameter Action Min Max
Reg. Reg. Type
Modbus Mode 3209 43209 Integer R/W L1a 0 2
DO Alarm Setup 3210 43210 Integer R/W L1a 0 108
4-20mA % Test 3211 43211 Integer R/W L1a 0 101
Low Power Warning 3212 43212 Integer R/W L1a 200 4999
User Password 3213 43213 Integer R/W L1a 0 9999
DO Alarm Delay 3214 43214 Integer R/W L1a 0 30000
Main Matrix 3215 43215 Integer R/W L1 0 3
Validation Matrix 3216 43216 Integer R/W L1 0 3
4-20 mA Val Action 3217 43217 Integer R/W L1 0 1
Password 4999 44999 Integer R/W L0 0 9999
a. Write privilege requires User Level 1 (L1) password to be downloaded to the Pass-
word register.
Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions

• Concentration: Current live concentration in selected engineering
units.
• Temperature: Current live temperature of the gas sample in
selected engineering units.
• Pressure: Current live pressure reading of the gas sample in
selected engineering units atmospheric.
• Supply Voltage: The current live supply voltage to the analyzer
board.
• PkD1(Current Midpoint): The current midpoint value being used in
the analyzer when peak tracking is turned on.
• Firmware Version: Firmware version running in the analyzer.
• S Factor: Slope adjustment enabling the analyzer to be tuned to
match a specific calibration standard without affecting the factory
calibration.
• S Factor Offset: Offset adjustment enabling the analyzer to be
tuned to match a specific calibration standard without affecting the
factory calibration.
• Alarm Setpoint: Triggers a digital output alarm when the
concentration is lower than (exceeds) the set point. (Only for relay
configured units)
8–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

• Pipeline Pressure: Sets the pressure used in calculating dew point.

The pressure unit is mb when setting this parameter via Modbus
communications and as set by the Pressure Unit parameter when
setting via the front panel.
• 4 mA Value (ppmv): Controls the low range of the 4-20 mA
output.
• 20 mA Value (ppmv): Controls the high range of the 4-20 mA
output.
• Concen Unit Convert: If set to 0, the default conversion factor for
Concentration Unit is used, but if set to a value, this will be the value
used for the conversion factor (multiplier) that is used.
• Alarm Flags: Long integer register identifying the status of each
individual alarm in the analyzer as follows:
Bit 0 = 1, general fault condition exists
Bit 1 = 1, Null Fail Error condition exists
Bit 2 = 1, Spectrum Fail Error condition exists
Bit 3 = 1, PT Fail condition exists
Bit 4 = 1, Power Fail Error condition exists
Bit 5 = 1, Track Fail Error condition exists
Bit 6 = 1, Concentration is over user defined limit
Bit 7 = 1, Power Warning condition exists
• Analyzer ID: User defined numeric analyzer ID.
• Sample ID: User defined numeric sample ID.
• Component ID: User defined numeric component ID.
• PP2F (counts): Value of the concentration signal.
• Power (counts): Laser power detected at the absorption peak.
• Indx: Position of the absorption peak along scan.
• Zero (counts): Detected signal level with laser off.
• # Spectrum Average: Number of scans averaged for each
measurement.
• Logger Rate: Running average of the concentration reading.
• Peak Tracking: Turns peak tracking on and off.
• 4-20 mA Alarm Action: Sets 4-20 mA signal reaction to alarm
condition.
• Temperature Unit: Sets the temperature measurement units.
• Pressure Unit: Sets the pressure measurement units.
• Concentration Unit: Sets the concentration measurement units.
• Modbus Address: User assigned numeric address identifying
analyzer to Modbus host system.

• Modbus Mode: Sets the Modbus communication protocol type.

• DO Alarm Setup: Sets function of the secondary digital output.
• 4-20 mA % Test: User set relative output of 4-20 mA current loop.
• Low Power Warning: Sets the level at which the analyzer will issue
a Low Power Warning.
• DO Alarm Delay: Sets the number of consecutive readings
concentration must be above setpoint before triggering a High
Concentration Alarm.
• Main Matrix: Picks the current calibration matrix that is used when
Mode 1 is pressed and when parameters are changed. Up to four
calibrations can be saved.
• Validation Matrix: Picks the current calibration matrix that is used
when Mode 7 (Ch A) or Mode 8 (Ch B) is pressed.
• 4-20 mA Val Action: When Mode 7 (Ch A) or Mode 8 (Ch B) is
pressed, the analyzer will either hold the last known value for the
analog output or update the analog output with the validation
measurements.
• Password: Password required to change register settings. In the
above table those registers denoted as R/W L1 can be modified if the
User Level 1 password is downloaded to this register.
• User Password: Sets Level 1 password.
8–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix A: Specifications
Table A–1 Analyzer specifications
Performance
Concentration a
Refer to calibration report
Repeatability Refer to calibration report
H2S: <5 seconds

Measurement Update Time b
H2O: 1 second
Periodic Scrubber Cycle Duration 90 seconds
Application Data
Environmental Temperature Range/ –4° to 122° F (–20° C to 50° C) - Standard
Sample Cell Temperature Range -5° to 140 °F (-15° to 60° C) - Optional
Heated SCS Enclosure Temperature 50±1 °C
Environmental Relative Humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31 °C max
Altitude Up to 4000 m
Sample Inlet Pressure 1.5-4 barG (20-50 PSIG) to enclosure inlet
800-1200 mbar - Standard

Cell Pressure Range
950-1700 mbar - Optional
H2S: 4 l/min. (8 scfh)

Sample Flow Rate
H2O: 1 l/min. (2 scfh)
H2S: Binary cal gas bottle

Recommended Validation H2O: Bureau of Mines Chilled Mirror, portable TDL or
binary cal gas
Electrical & Communications

100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz single phase - Standard
Input Voltagec
18–24 VDC - Optional, electronics only
Current (analyzer) 3A max @ 120 VAC, 1.5A max.@ 240 VAC Hz
Current (enclosure heater) 2A max @ 120 VAC, 1 A @ 240VAC
Contact Rating 250V, 3A N.O. contact, 1.5A N.C. contact

(Inductive Load) 24V, 1A N.O. and N.C. contact
Communication Analog: Isolated 4-20mA, 1200 ohms @ 24 VDC max -

(concentration only)
Serial: RS-232C (all parameters)
Protocol: Modbus Gould RTU or Daniel RTU
Digital Outputs 2; (1) General Fault and (1) Hi/Lo Concentration Alarm
per measurement cell
a. Consult factory for alternative ranges.

b. Total system response is dependant on flow rate and sample system volume.
c. Supply voltage not to exceed ±10% of nominal. Transient over-voltages according to Over Voltage
Category II.
Operator’s Manual A–1

Physical Specifications
57” H × 30” W × 13” D
Size (typical)
(1450 mm H × 760 mm W × 330 mm D)
Weight (typical) Approx. 340 lbs (154 kg)
Sample Cell Construction 316L series polished stainless steel
Area Classification
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C & D, T3 with heater
Analyzer (electronics & laser)
(T3C without heater
SCS is assembled using electrical components that are

Analyzer with Sample Conditioning
certified for Class 1, Div. 2, Groups B, C & D, T3 or bet-
System
ter. SCS assembly is not a certified product.
A–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Operator’s Manual
Specifications
Figure A–1 Standard outline schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system
A–3
A–4

4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13
Figure A–2 Standard outline schematic (side view) of 2-Pack analyzer system
Operator’s Manual
DWG. NO.
REV.
Specifications
Figure A–3 Standard flow schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system
A–5
A–6

4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13
Figure A–4 Standard electrical schematic of 2-Pack

analyzer system
Specifications
Spare Parts
Below is a list of spare parts for the 2-Pack H2S/H2O analyzer system with
recommended quantities for 2 years of operation. Due to a policy of continuous
improvement, parts and part numbers may change without notice. Not all parts
listed are included on every analyzer. When ordering, please specify the system
serial number to ensure that the correct parts are identified.
Table A–2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer
Part 2 YR
Description
Number QTY
H2S Analyzer
8000002199 Temperature Control Board a
-
2900000090 4-20 mA Current Loop Board -
8000002203 Power Supply Assembly, 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1

-
8000002300 Power Supply Assembly, 24 VDC 1
0190217106 External Serial Output Cable -
0190230011 Keypad Assembly 1

-
2460100002 Display Assembly 1

-
0220313100 Relay Control Board 1

-
4500002002 Relay, DC12V SPDT 3 A/120 VAC 1

-
0210117102 Pressure Transducer Assembly 1

-
0210117103 Temperature Transducer Assembly 1

-
0219900006 Kit, Viton O-rings and Screws for Herriott Cell 1

1
0219900011 Kit, Fuse, AC/DC 1
H2O Analyzer
0190213000 Temperature Control Board -
2300000030 4-20 mA Current Loop Board -
8000002203 Power Supply Assembly, 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz

-
8000002300 Power Supply Assembly, 24 VDC
0190217106 External Serial Cable -
0190230011 Keypad Assembly -
0190231000 Display Assembly -
4500002002 Relay, SPDT, D12VDC, 3 A/125 VAC -
a. Contact SpectraSensors’ service department before attempting replacement. Replacing this

component without technical support could cause damage to other components. Contact ser-
vice at 1-800-619-2861 (option 2) or service@spectrasensors.com.

Table A-2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer (Continued)
Part 2 YR
Description
Number QTY
H2O Analyzer (Continued)

0210117102 Pressure Transducer Assembly -
0219900005 Kit, Spares (O-rings, screws), Viton, 2-Pass Cell -
0219900011 Kit, Fuse, AC/DC 1
General
0219900007 Kit, Cleaning Tools, Optical Cell -
4900002006 SS2100 2-Pack Operator’s Manual Rev. K, additional copies -

6200002480 Modular Sample System, Parker IFS156-STDDFS-2A-I4NV -
6101673407 Membrane Separator, Modular, Genie MG-3407-SS -
61016MG5X7 Element, Membrane Separator, Modular, Genie MG-5X7 2
6134100274 Flowmeter (w/Valve), 2 SLPM, 1/4” FNPT (SS), King -

74C123G081123810
6134100674 Flowmeter (w/Valve), 6 SLPM, 1/4” FNPT (SS), King -

74C123G081523810
2800002041 Rebuild Kit, Flowmeter, Viton, King 7430 4
6200002406 Pressure Regulator, 1–30 psig, Modular, Parker DM4001SK2PG -
6200002407 Rebuild Kit, Pressure Regulator, 1-30 psig, Modular Parker -

53310150-1
6100002004 Pressure Gauge, 0–30 psig, McDaniel SBL -
6200002006 Pressure Gauge, 0–60 psig, McDaniel SCL -
6200002410 Relief Valve, 25–50 psig, Modular, Parker IF-RL4A-VT-1P-SS-KB -
6200002471 Filter Element & O-ring, 10-micron, Modular, Parker 53310150- 2

1
6200002399 Ball Valve, 2-Way, Modular, Parker IF-B2LJ2-V-SS -
1400402310 Heater, 200 W, 120 VAC, Intertec CP Veritherm CPA 200-T3- -

100-120V
1400412304 Heater, 200 W, 240 VAC, Intertec CP Veritherm DPA-200-T3-40-

230V
5300002004 Temperature Controller, 120 VAC, Intertec TC CD E1 S J - 50C -
1400403260 Temperature Controller, 240 VAC, Intertec TC ATEX AI S10-60C-

230V
A–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Specifications
Table A-2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer (Continued)
Part 2 YR
Description
Number QTY

6131401004 Solenoid Valve, 3-Way, 120 VAC, 1/8” FNPT, Bürkert 98124074 1
6131401003 Solenoid Valve, 3-Way, 230 VAC, 1/8” FNPT, Bürkert 98123905
55032340B6 Temperature Gauge, (3” Dia), 200F, 4” Stem, 1/2” NPT, -

Reotemp AA-040-1-D43-TG
6132210102 Pressure Regulator, 25 psig, 1/8” FNPT (SS) Go CPR1- -

1A01ACC111
0900002146 Stainless Steel Mirror -
8000002207 Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 2” Dia.
8000002207-R Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 2” Dia., Refurbished 1
8000002209 Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 3” Dia.
8000002209-R Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 3” Dia., Refurbished

A–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix B: Troubleshooting the
Analyzer
This section presents recommendations and solutions to common problems,
such as gas leaks, contamination, excessive sampling gas temperatures and
pressures, and electrical noise. If your analyzer does not appear to be
hampered by one of these related problems, refer to “Service Contact” on
page B-17.
Gas Leaks
Probably the most common cause of erroneous measurements is outside air
leaking into the sample supply line. It is recommended the supply lines be
periodically leak-tested, especially if the analyzer has been relocated or has
been replaced or returned to the factory for service and the sample lines have
been reconnected.
Do not use plastic tubing of any kind for sample lines. Plastic
tubing is permeable to moisture and other substances which can
contaminate the sample stream. SpectraSensors recommends
using 1/4” O.D x 00.035” wall thickness, seamless stainless steel
tubing.

the SCS.
Contamination
Contamination and long exposure to high humidity are valid reasons for
periodically cleaning the gas sampling lines. Contamination in the gas sampling
lines can potentially find its way to the sample cell and deposit on the optics or
interfere with the measurement in some other way. Although the analyzer is
designed to withstand some contamination, it is recommended to always keep
the sampling lines as contamination free as possible.
To keep the sampling lines clean:

1. Make sure that a membrane separator filter (included with most
systems) is installed ahead of the analyzer and operating normally.
Replace the membrane if necessary. If liquid enters the cell and
accumulates on the internal optics, a fault will result (Laser Power
Low Alrm [FS 5.13], Power Fail [v2.50]).
Operator’s Manual B–1

2. If mirror contamination is suspected, see “Cleaning the Mirrors”

on page B-2.
3. Turn off the sample valve at the tap in accordance with site lock-out,
tag-out rules.
4. Disconnect the gas sampling line from the supply port of the
analyzer.
5. Wash the sampling line with alcohol or acetone and blow dry with
mild pressure from a dry air or nitrogen source.
6. Once the sampling line is completely free of solvent, reconnect the
gas sampling line to the supply port of the analyzer.
Cleaning the Mirrors

If contamination makes its way into the cell and accumulates on the internal
optics, a fault will result (Laser Power Low Alrm [FS 5.13], Power Fail
[v2.50]). If mirror contamination is suspected, please consult with your factory
sales representative before attempting to clean the mirrors. If advised to do
so, use the following procedure.
This procedure should be used ONLY when necessary and is not

part of routine maintenance. To avoid compromising the system
warranty, contact SpectraSensors Technical Service Group at
1-800-619-2861 (or by e-mail at service@spectrasensors.com)
or your local representative before cleaning mirrors
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION - The

sample cell assembly contains a low-power,
LASER RADIATION 10 mW MAX, CW Class 3b invisible laser with
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT a wavelength between 750-3000 nm. Never
open the sample cell flanges or the optical
assembly unless the power is turned off.
Determining the type of cell mirror:
Measurement cells will come equipped with either a glass or stainless steel
mirror. Before determining whether to clean or replace the mirror, identify the
type of measurement cell being used in the analyzer. There are four types of
measurement cells; 0.1-m, 0.8-m, 8-m and 28-m. Refer to Figure B–1.
B–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Troubleshooting the Analyzer
0.1-m
0.8-m CELL 8-m/28-m
Figure B–1 Measurement cell types
The stainless steel mirrors are used with 0.1-m and 0.8-m measurement cells
only and have been identified with an “X” engraved on the external side of the
mirror. Glass mirrors can be used on any size cell. To determine the type of
mirror being used for the system cell:
1. Feel at the bottom of the cell for the engraved “X” marking. Refer to
Figure B–2 below.
Figure B–2 Stainless steel mirror marking
2. If the surface is smooth, a glass mirror is being used.

3. If the surface is rough, or an engraving is detected, a stainless steel

mirror is being used.
Do not attempt to replace a glass mirror with a stainless steel

mirror or system calibration may be adversely affected.
To clean the mirror, refer to the instructions “To clean the mir-
rors” on page B-4. To replace a stainless steel mirror, refer to the
instructions for “Stainless steel mirror replacement” on page
B-6.
Tools and supplies

• Lens cleaning cloth (Cole Parmer® EW-33677-00 TEXWIPE®
Alphawipe® Low-Particulate Clean Room Wipes or equivalent)
• Reagent-grade isopropanol (ColeParmer® EW-88361-80 or
equivalent)
• Small drop dispenser bottle (Nalgene® 2414 FEP Drop Dispenser
Bottle or equivalent)
• Acetone-impenetrable gloves (North NOR CE412W Nitrile Chemsoft™
CE Cleanroom Gloves or equivalent)
• Hemostat (Fisherbrand™ 13-812-24 Rochester-Pean Serrated
Forceps)
• Bulb blower or dry compressed air/nitrogen
• Torque wrench
• Permanent marker
• Flashlight
To clean the mirrors

1. Power down the analyzer following the procedure outlined under “To
power down the analyzer” in the appropriate firmware operations
chapter.
The sample cell assembly contains a low-power, 10 mW MAX, CW

Class 3b invisible laser with a wavelength between 750-3000 nm.
Never open the sample cell flanges or the optical assembly unless
the power is turned off.
B–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

2. Isolate the analyzer from the sample bypass flow by following the
procedure outlined under “To isolate the measurement sample
cell for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

3. If possible, purge the system with nitrogen for 10 minutes.

the SCS.
4. Carefully mark the orientation of the mirror assembly on the cell

body.
Careful marking of the mirror orientation is critical to restoring

system performance upon reassembly after cleaning.
5. Gently remove the mirror assembly from the cell by removing the 4
(28- or 8-m measurement cell) or 6 (0.1-m or 0.8-m measurement
cell) socket-head cap screws and set on a clean, stable and flat
surface.

Always handle the optical assembly by the edge of the mount.

Never touch the coated surfaces of the mirror.
6. Look inside the sample cell at the top mirror using a flashlight to
ensure that there is no contamination on the top mirror.
SpectraSensors does not recommend cleaning the top mirror. If

the top mirror is visibly contaminated, contact your factory
service representative.
7. Remove dust and other large particles of debris from the lower
mirror using a bulb blower or dry compressed air/nitrogen.
Pressurized gas duster products are not recommended as the
propellent may deposit liquid droplets onto the optic surface.

8. Put on clean acetone-impenetrable gloves.

9. Double fold a clean sheet of lens cleaning cloth and clamp near and
along the fold with the hemostats or fingers to form a “brush.”
10. Place a few drops of isopropanol onto the mirror and rotate the
mirror to spread the liquid evenly across the mirror surface.
11. With gentle, uniform pressure, wipe the mirror from one edge to the
other with the cleaning cloth only once and only in one direction to
remove the contamination. Discard the cloth.
Never rub an optical surface, especially with dry tissues, as this

can mar or scratch the coated surface.
12. Repeat with a clean sheet of lens cleaning cloth to remove the streak
left by the first wipe. Repeat, if necessary, until there is no visible
contamination on the mirror.
13. Carefully replace the mirror assembly onto the cell in the same
orientation as previously marked making sure the O-ring is properly
seated.
14. Tighten the 4 socket-head cap screws evenly with a torque wrench
to 30 in-lbs (28- or 8-m measurement cell) or 13 in-lbs (0.1-m,
0.8-m measurement cell).
Stainless steel mirror replacement

If your system has been configured with a stainless steel mirror in the 0.1-m
or 0.8-m measurement cell, use the following instructions for replacing the
mirror.
If stainless steel mirrors are replacing another version of mirror in

the field, such as glass, the analyzer may need to be returned to
the factory for re-calibration to ensure optimal cell function. Refer
to “Service Contact” on page B-17.
1. Power down the analyzer following the procedure outlined in the

section called ““Powering Down the Analyzer” in the appropriate
firmware operations chapter.
2. Isolate the analyzer from the sample bypass flow by shutting off the
appropriate valve(s) and/or pressure regulator.

B–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

3. If possible, purge the measurement cell with nitrogen for 10

minutes.

the SCS.
4. Gently remove the mirror assembly from the cell by removing the
socket-head cap screws and set on a clean, stable and flat surface.

Always handle the optical assembly by the edge of the mount.

Never touch the optical surfaces of the mirror.
5. Confirm need to replace mirror due to contamination. If yes, set

mirror aside.
6. Put on clean acetone-impenetrable gloves.
7. Obtain the new stainless steel mirror. Refer to Figure B–3.
Figure B–3 Stainless steel

mirror - mirror side up
8. Check the O-ring.

a. If a new O-ring is needed, apply grease on fingertips and then
to the new O-ring.
b. Place newly greased O-ring into the groove around the outside
of the mirror taking care not to touch the mirror surface.
9. Carefully place the new stainless steel mirror onto the cell making
sure the O-ring is properly seated.

10. Tighten the socket-head cap screws evenly with a torque wrench to
13 in-lbs.
Excessive Sampling Gas Temperatures and

Pressures
The embedded software is designed to produce accurate measurements only
within the allowable cell operating range (see Table A–1 on page A–1).
The cell temperature operating range for analyzers that are

equipped with heated enclosures is equal to the enclosure
temperature setpoint ±5 °C.
Pressures and temperatures outside these ranges will trigger a Pressure Low
Alarm, Pressure High Alarm, Temp Low Alarm, or Temp High Alarm fault
(FS 5.13) or P/T Fail fault (v2.50).
If the pressure, temperature, or any other readings on the LCD

appear suspect, they should be checked against the specifications
(see Table A–1 on page A–1).
Electrical Noise
High levels of electrical noise can interfere with laser operation and cause it to
become unstable. Always connect the analyzer to a properly grounded power
source.
Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (FS 5.13)

The analyzer’s software is equipped with a peak tracking function that keeps
the laser scan centered on the absorption peak. Under some circumstances,
the peak tracking function can get lost and lock onto the wrong peak. If the
PeakTk Restart Alarm is displayed, the peak tracking function should be
reset.
To reset the Peak Tracking function:


Enter password:
FS 5.13-XXXX
B–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

(3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number to
enter Mode 2.

Process Purge Time
60
2. Starting with the first parameter that displays, press the * key to
cycle through the screens until the Peak Tracking parameter
displays.

PeakTracking
1
0:Off 1:On 2:Rst
3. Press 2 (RST or Reset) followed by the * key. The peak tracking

function will return the current analyzer midpoint to the factory
default midpoint, and then automatically revert the parameter value
to its setting before the reset was initiated. In most cases, the peak
tracking should be set to 1 for on.
4. Press the * key to cycle through the screens until the General
Alarm DO parameter displays.

General Alarm DO
2
0:L 1:NonL 2:Reset
5. Press 2 (RESET) followed by the * key. The General Fault relay and
any active alarms will be reset to the ‘Normal’ state. After the relay
resets, this parameter will automatically revert to the setting before
the reset was initiated.
6. Press the mode key # followed by 1 to return to Mode 1 (Normal
Mode).
Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (v2.50)

The analyzer’s software is equipped with a peak tracking function that keeps
the laser scan centered on the absorption peak. Under some circumstances,
the peak tracking function can get lost and lock onto the wrong peak. If the

difference between PkDf and PkD1 is more than 4, or Track Fail fault is
displayed, the peak tracking function should be reset.
To check the PkDf and PkD1 values:

1. Press the # key followed by the 4 key to enter Mode 4 (Diagnostic
Parameters).
PP2F:8190 PkDf:34.00
Powr:2538 PkD1:34.00
Indx: 301
Zero: -24
2. Compare the values for PkDf and PkD1. If the difference is more
than 4, reset the peak tracking function.
To reset Peak Tracking:

1. Press the # key followed by the 2 key. The LCD will prompt for a
numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad,

Enter password
v2.50 5-24-13 DM
then press the * key to enter Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode).

2. Press the * key to cycle through the screens until the Peak
Tracking parameter appears.

Peak Tracking
1
0:Off 1:Track 2:Reset
3. Press 2 (RESET) followed by the * key. The peak tracking function

will cycle off then on and reset.
4. Press the mode key # followed by 1 to return to Mode 1 (Normal
Mode).
B–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Instrument Problems
If the instrument does not appear to be hampered by gas leaks, contamination,
excessive sampling gas temperatures and pressures, or electrical noise, refer
to Table B–1 before contacting your sales representative for service.
Table B–1 Potential instrument problems and solutions
Symptom Response
Non-Operation (at start up) Is the power connected to both the
analyzer and power source? Is the
switch on?
Non-Operation (after start up) Is the power source good? (100-
250 VAC @ 50-60 Hz, 9-16 VDC, 18-
32 VDC).
Check fuse(s). If bad, replace with
equivalent amperage, slow-blow fuse.
Contact a factory sales representative
for service information.
Laser Power Low Alrm fault Turn off the power to the unit and
(FS 5.13) check the optical head cables for a
loose connection. Do not disconnect
or reconnect any optical head
cables with the power connected.
Check the inlet and outlet tubes to see
if they are under any stress. Remove
the connections to the inlet and outlet
tubes and see if the power goes up.
Perhaps the existing tubing needs to be
replaced with stainless steel flexible
tubing.
Press # 6 to capture diagnostic data
and send the file to SpectraSensors.
Possible alignment problem. Contact a
factory sales representative for service
information.
Possible mirror contamination issue.
for service information. If advised to do
so, clean the mirrors by following the
instructions under “To clean the mir-
rors” on page B-4.

Table B-1 Potential instrument problems and solutions (Continued)
Symptom Response
Power Fail (v2.50) Turn off the power to the unit and
check the optical head cables for a
Verify power failure by pressing # 4

and checking the DC value. If it is
greater than 500, then the Power Fail
fault is spurious. Return to # 1 and see
if the error has changed.
Check the inlet and outlet tubes to see
if they are under any stress. Remove
the connections to the inlet and outlet
tubes and see if the power goes up.
Perhaps the existing tubing needs to be
replaced with stainless steel flexible
tubing.
Possible alignment problem. Contact a
factory sales representative for service
information.
Possible mirror contamination issue.
for service information. If advised to do
so, clean the mirrors by following the
instructions under “To clean the mir-
rors” on page B-4.
Pressure too Low or Pressure too Check that the actual pressure in the
High fault (FS 5.13) measurement cell is within specifica-
tion.
Check the connector on the pressure
transducer. Check the pressure connec-
tor on the backplane board.
Temp Low Alarm or Temp High Check that the actual temperature in
the measurement cell is within specifi-
Alarm fault (FS 5.13) cation. For systems with a heated
enclosure, check that the temperature
in the measurement cell is within +/-
5 °C of the specified enclosure temper-
ature.
B–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Symptom Response
Temp Low Alarm or Temp High Check the connector on the cell tem-
perature sensor. Check the tempera-
Alarm fault (Continued) (FS 5.13) ture connector on the backplane board.
(Note: A temperature reading greater
than 150 °C indicates a short circuit on
the temperature sensor leads; a read-
ing of less than –30 °C indicates an
open circuit).
Null Fail (v2.50) Verify Null Fail fault by pressing # 4
and checking the zero reading is out-
side the range of -40 to 40. If not, the
Null Fail fault is spurious. Return to #1
and see if the error has changed.
Move the jumper JMP1 on the HC12
main board next to the pre-pot.
Spectrum Fail (v2.50) Verify Spectrum Fail fault by pressing
# 4 and checking the index value. If it
is within a few counts of xleftvmr or
xrightvmr, then it is a real Spectrum
Fail fault.
Turn off the power to the unit and
check the optical head cables for a
Turn the analyzer off for 30 seconds
and then turn it on again.
Reset the peak tracking.
If the index is within a few counts of
240, then decrease the midpoint value
by 3 mA. (This is most likely if the unit
is either very hot or very cold com-
pared to the normal operating temper-
ature).
If the index is within a few counts of
300, then increase the midpoint value
by 3 mA. (This is most likely if the unit
is either very hot or very cold com-
pared to the normal operating temper-
ature).

Symptom Response
Spectrum Fail (v2.50) (Continued) Press # 6 to capture diagnostic data
P/T Fail (v2.50) Check that the actual pressure in the
measurement cell is within specification
(see Table A–1 on page A–1).
If the pressure reading is incorrect,
check the connector on the pressure
transducer. Check the pressure connec-
tor on the backplane board.
Check that the actual temperature in
the measurement cell is within specifi-
cation (see Table A–1 on page A–1).
If the temperature reading is incorrect,
check the connector on the cell temper-
ature sensor. Check the temperature
connector on the backplane board.
(Note: A temperature reading greater
than 150 °C indicates a short circuit on
the temperature sensor leads; a read-
ing of less than –40 °C indicates an
open circuit).
Track Fail (v2.50) Press #4 and see if PkDf and PkD1
differ by more than 4, otherwise erro-
neous error.
Reset the peak tracking function (see
“To reset Peak Tracking” on page
B-10).
Front panel display is not lit and no char- Check for correct voltage on terminal
acters appear block input. Observe polarity on DC
powered units.
Check for correct voltage after fuses.
Check for 5 VDC on red wires, 12 VDC
on yellow wires, and 24 VDC on orange
wires from power supply (black wires
are ground).
Check connections on display commu-
nication and power cables.
Strange characters appear on front panel Check connections on display commu-
display nication cable.
Pressing keys on front panel do not have Check connections on keypad cable.
specified effect
B–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Symptom Response
System stuck in Fit Delta Exceeds Limit Contact a factory sales representative
for greater than 30 minutes (FS 5.13) for service information.
Not getting enough flow to the sample Check both the micro filter and mem-
cell. brane separator for contamination.
Replace if necessary.
Check if supply pressure is sufficient.
No reading on device connected to cur- Make sure that connected device can
rent loop accept a 4-20 mA signal. The analyzer
is set to source current.
Make sure the device is connected to
the correct terminals (see Table 2–3 on
page 2–16 or Table 2–4 on page 2–18).
Check the open circuit voltage (35-
40 VDC) across the current loops ter-
minals (see Table 2–3 on page 2–16 or
Table 2–4 on page 2–18).
Replace the current loop device with a
milliampere meter and look for current
between 4 mA and 20 mA. A voltmeter
connected across a 249-ohm resistor
can be used instead of the milliampere
meter; it should read between 1 and 5
volts.
Current loop is stuck at 4 mA or 20 mA Check display for error message. If
alarm has been triggered, reset the
alarm.
On the current loop board, check the
voltage between the end of resistor R1
closest to the jumper and ground. If
the concentration reading is high, the
voltage should be near 1 VDC. If the
concentration reading is low, the volt-
age should be near 4.7 VDC. If not, the
problem is probably on the ARM9 main
board. Return to factory for service.
Reading seems to always be high by a Capture diagnostic data and send the
fixed amount file to SpectraSensors (see “To read
diagnostic data with HyperTermi-
nal” on page 5-6 or page 8–4).
See “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to
Match Specific Standard(s)” on
page 4-32 or page 7–18.

Symptom Response
Reading seems to always be low by a See “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to
fixed amount Match Specific Standard(s)” on
Capture diagnostic data and send the
file to SpectraSensors (see “To read
Reading seems to always be high by a Capture diagnostic data and send the
fixed percentage file to SpectraSensors (see “To read
Check that Peak Tracking is enabled
(see “To change parameters in
Mode 2” on page 4-13 or page 7–9).
See “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to
Match Specific Standard(s)” on
Reading seems to always be low by a See “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to
fixed percentage Match Specific Standard(s)” on
Reading displays 0.0 or seems relatively Capture diagnostic data and send the
low file to SpectraSensors (see “To read
Reading is erratic or seems incorrect Check for contamination in the sample
system, especially if the readings are
much higher than expected.
Reading goes to “0” If 4-20 mA Alarm Action is set to 2,
look on display for an error message
Gas concentration is equal to zero.
B–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Symptom Response
Reading goes to full scale If 4-20 mA Alarm Action is set to 1,
look on display for an error message
Gas concentration is greater than or
equal to full scale value.
Serial output is displaying garbled data Make sure the computer COM port is
set for 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, no parity, and no flow control. (FS
5.13)
Make sure the computer COM port is
bit, no parity, and no flow control.
(v2.50)
Be sure no other programs are using
the COM port selected.
Make sure the connections are good.
Verify the correct pin connections with
an ohmmeter.
Serial output is providing no data Make sure the analyzer is operating in
Mode 1 and readings are being dis-
played on the LCD.
Be sure no other programs are using
the COM port selected.
Make sure the computer COM port is
bit, no parity, and no flow control.
Make sure the connections are good.
Verify the correct pin connections with
an ohmmeter.
Make sure to select the correct COM
port into which the cable is plugged.
LCD does not update. Unit is locked up for Switch off power, wait 30 seconds, and
more than 5 minutes. then switch power back on.
Service Contact
If the troubleshooting solutions do not resolve the problem, contact customer
service. To return the unit for service or replacement, refer to "Return
Material Authorization".

Customer Service
4333 W Sam Houston Pkwy N, Suite 100
Houston, TX 77043-1223
For SpectraSensors North America Service:
Phone: (800) 619-2861, and press 2 for Service
Fax: (713) 856-6623
E-mail: service@spectrasensors.com
For SpectraSensors International Service, please contact the
SpectraSensors distributor in your area, or contact:
Phone: (713) 466-3172, and press 2 for Service
Fax: (713) 856-6623
E-mail: techsupport@spectrasensors.com
Return Material Authorization

If returning the unit is required, obtain a Return Materials Authorization
(RMA) Number from Customer Service before returning the analyzer to the
factory. Your service representative can determine whether the analyzer can
be serviced on site or should be returned to the factory.
Disclaimers
SpectraSensors accepts no responsibility for consequential damages arising
from the use of this equipment. Liability is limited to replacement and/or repair
of defective components.
This manual contains information protected by copyright. No part of this guide
may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent
from SpectraSensors.
Warranty
The manufacturer warrants the items delivered shall be free from defects
(latent and patent) in material and workmanship for a period of one year after
delivery to the Buyer. The Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy under this
warranty shall be limited to repair or replacement. Defective goods must be
returned to the manufacturer and/or its distributor for valid warranty claims.
This warranty shall become inapplicable in instances where the items have
been misused or otherwise subjected to negligence by the Buyer.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, no other warranties,
whether statutory or arising by operation of law, expressed or implied,
including but not limited to those of merchantability or fitness for particular
purpose, shall apply to the goods or services hereunder, other than the repair
and replacement warranty above. Seller shall in no event be liable to Buyer or
any third party for any damage, injury or loss, including loss of use or any
direct or indirect incidental or consequential damages of any kind.
B–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix C: Water Correlation
Water Content
In the context of gas analyzers, water content refers to the concentration of
water vapor in the gaseous phase. Water content is typically stated as mole,
mass or volume fraction, which are independent of a reference state, or as
mass of water per volume of gas, which is dependent on a reference state. For
relatively low water content, the mole fraction of water in the gaseous phase
(yw) is typically given in dimensionless form as parts per million (ppm),
nw
- × 106 [ppm] ,
y w = ------------------ (1)
nw + nm
where nw is the number of moles of water, nm is the number of moles of the

“dry” mixture. For mass and volume fraction, the units would be ppm(m) and
ppm(v) or ppmv, respectively. In the event the water content is extremely low,
parts per billion (ppb) or even parts per trillion (ppt) may be used.
Water content expressed as mass of water per volume of gas is typically given
in milligrams per normal cubic meter (mg/Nm3), where the letter “N” indicates
normal reference conditions (typically 0°C and 1atm), or pounds per million
standard cubic feet (lb/MMscf), where “s” indicates standard reference
conditions (typically 60°F and 1atm). As shown in Table C–1, the definition of
reference conditions varies considerably, and thus, should be specified
explicitly when using units dependent on a reference state. Here, normal
reference conditions are P N = 101325Pa and T N = 273.15K.
The conversion of water content (WC) from mole fraction to mass per volume
of gas (mg/Nm3) is given by,
yw Mw PN
WC = -------------- ----------------- [mg/Nm3] , (2)
1 – y w Z N RT N
where Mw is the molecular weight of water (18015.2 mg/mol), TN is the

temperature at normal reference conditions (K), PN is the pressure at normal
reference conditions (Pa), ZN is the compressibility of the “dry” gas mixture at
normal reference conditions, and R is the universal gas constant (8.3145
J/mol•K). For perfect gases, Z N = 1 and
yw
WC = -------------- × 803745 [mg/Nm3] . (3)
1 – yw
Operator’s Manual C–1

Table C–1 Common reference conditions
T P
Organization
(K) (Pa)
273.15 100000 International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) [1]
288.15 101325 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) [2]
298.15 100000 National Bureau of Standards (NBS) [3]
288.71 100000 Society of Petroleum Engineers (SPE) [4]
293.15 101325 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
288.71 101560 Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) [5]
288.71 101325 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHEA) [6]
Dew Point
In some instances, it is desired to express the water content in terms of the
water “dew point” for the gas mixture. The water dew point of a gas is the
temperature at which the gas is saturated with water at a given pressure.
Saturation implies that the water vapor is in equilibrium with water in the liquid
or solid phase (depending on which is present). When water vapor is in
equilibrium with the solid (ice) phase, the dew point is often referred to as the
“frost point.”
Dew Point Conversion

Various correlations and standards have been developed (some based on
Raoult’s law) that are currently used in natural gas practice for converting from
water dew point temperature to water content, such as ASTM 1142-95 (2006)
[8], Bucacek [9], the Arden Buck method and ISO 18453:2006 [10].
Raoult’s Law
Assuming ideal gas behavior, the simplest thermodynamically based equation
for calculating water content at the dew point temperature is based on Raoult’s
law [7]
y w P = x w P wsat ( T ) , (4)
where yw is the mole fraction of water in the vapor phase, P is the total
pressure, xw is the mole fraction of water in the liquid phase, and P wsat is the
saturation (vapor) pressure of pure water at the dew point temperature T.
Assuming the liquid phase is pure water, i.e., there is negligible gas solubility,
x w = 1 and we get
P wsat ( T )
y w = -----------------
- . (5)
P
C–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
Expressions of this type do not take into account the composition of the gas
mixture. Although Eq. (5) is of limited utility because of the simplifying
assumptions on which it is based, such as perfect gas behavior, reasonable
estimates of water content can be obtained for pressures up to 0.4MPa, above
which real gas effects become significant.
Arden Buck Equations

The Arden Buck equations are a group of empirical correlations that relate the
saturation vapor pressure to temperature for moist air at close to atmospheric
pressure. The curve fits have been optimized for more accuracy than the
Goff–Gratch equation in the range −80 to 50°C. [11]
Arden Buck equations are not typically used for natural gas
applications; however, results are comparable at near
atmospheric pressures.
A set of several equations were developed, each of which is applicable in a

different situation.
Enhancements to the method were published in 1996.[12]
A humidity conversion software (HCONL), developed by Buck Research
Instruments LLC, is commonly used as a simple tool that easily converts any
humidity parameter to any other humidity units.
ASTM1
ASTM 1142-95 (2006) includes two correlations, the first of which (referred to
here as ASTM1) is a variation of Eq. (5) that expresses the water content in
terms of the weight of saturated water vapor, or [8]
6 Pb T
WC = ( w × 10 ) ------ ----- , (6)
P Tb
where WC is the water content (lb/MMscf) at reference conditions Tb (R) and Pb

(psia), w is the weight of saturated water vapor (lb/ft3), P is the pressure at
which the dew point was determined (psia), and T is the observed dew point
temperature (R). The reciprocal of w, or the specific volume of saturated water
vapor (ft3/lb), is listed as a function of temperature in Table 1 of ASTM 1142-
95 (2006) for temperatures ranging from 0°F to 100°F. Though not explicit in
temperature due to the temperature dependence of w, given the water content,
the corresponding dew point temperature can be solved for iteratively.
ASTM2
Bukacek proposed a relatively simple modified Raoult’s law approach where the
water content of sweet gas is calculated using the ideal expression of Eq. (5)
supplemented by a deviation factor [9],

P wsat
WC = ( 760.4 ) --------- + 0.016016B , (7)
P
where WC is the water content (g/Nm3), P wsat is the saturation vapor pressure
of pure water (MPa), P is the total pressure of the system (MPa), and B is given
by,
– 1713.66
log B = ---------------------- + 6.69449 , (8)
T
where T is the dew point temperature (K). The saturation vapor pressure can
be calculated using [13]
P wsat Tc
ln ⎛ ---------⎞ = ----- ( – 7.85823τ + 1.83991τ 1.5 – 11.7811τ 3
⎝ Pc ⎠ T , (9)
+ 22.6705 τ 3.5 – 1539393τ 4 + 1.77516τ 7.5 )

where T is the temperature (K), Tc is the critical temperature of water
(647.14K), Pc is the critical pressure of water (22.064MPa), and τ = 1 – T ⁄ T c .
A simplified version of Eq. (7)
A
WC = --- + B , (10)
P
(referred to here as ASTM2) is included in ASTM 1142-95 (2006) with
coefficients A and B (referenced to T b = 520 R and P b = 14.7 psia) listed as a
function of temperature in Table 2 for dew point temperatures ranging from
–40°F to 440°F. Though not explicit in temperature due to the temperature
dependence of A and B, given the water content, the corresponding dew point
temperature can be solved for iteratively.
Although conveniently simplistic, neither ASTM method takes into account the
actual gas composition. In addition, the range of data made available for the
specific volume of saturated water vapor (ASTM1) or for the coefficients A and
B (ASTM2) is somewhat limited.
ISO
Perhaps the most rigorous method to date is that of ISO 18453:2006. Based
on an extensive study conducted by Groupe Europeen de Recherches Gazieres
(GERG) [14], the ISO method uses an equation of state (EOS) approach to
calculate water content from water dew point temperature. The semi-empirical
Peng-Robinson (P-R) cubic EOS with repulsive and attractive terms has been
found to adequately reproduce the behavior of fluids in the gas and liquid phase
with the same equation. The P-R EOS for a pure component explicit in P is given
by [15]
RT - a(T)
P ( T ,V ) = ----------- – ---------------------------------- . (11)
V – b V 2 + 2bV – b 2
C–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
The coefficients are defined as
RT c
b = 0.07780 --------- (12)
Pc
and
2 2
0.45724R T c
a ( T ) = ---------------------------------- α ( T r ) , (13)
Pc
where T r = T ⁄ T c is the reduced temperature and α ( T r ) is a non-dimensional

function of the reduced temperature
1⁄2 2
α ( Tr ) = [ 1 + κ ( 1 – Tr )] , (14)
2
where κ = 0.37464 + 1.54226ω – 0.26992ω is a substance-specific constant
generalized using the acentric factor ω . Values for the critical pressure, critical
temperature and acentric factor are listed in Table C–2.
Table C–2 Gas composition [14]
Pc Tc
Component i ω
(MPa) (K)
Water (H2O) 1 22.064 647.14 0.34437
Methane (CH4) 2 4.599 190.55 0.01140
Ethane (C2H6) 3 4.872 305.33 0.09909
Nitrogen (N2) 4 3.399 126.26 0.03593
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 5 7.386 304.21 0.22394
Propane (C3H8) 6 4.246 369.85 0.15611
i-Butane (C4H10) 7 3.640 407.85 0.18465
n-Butane (C4H10) 8 3.784 425.14 0.19777

Table C-2 Gas composition [14] (Continued)
Pc Tc
Component i ω
(MPa) (K)
neo-Pentane (C5H12) 9 3.196 433.75 0.19528
i-Pentane (C5H12) 10 3.370 460.39 0.22606
n-Pentane (C5H12) 11 3.364 469.69 0.24983
Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) 12 3.020 507.85 0.29600
For water specifically, the α -function takes a different form in order to

accurately reproduce the water vapor pressure over ice as well as liquid [14]
1⁄2 1⁄2 2 1⁄2 4 2

α ( Tr ) = [ 1 + A1 ( 1 – Tr ) + A2 ( 1 – Tr ) + A3 ( 1 – Tr ) ] , (15)
where the coefficients, listed in Table C–3, take on different values depending
on whether the temperature is above or below freezing.
Table C–3 Coefficients for Eq. (15) [14]
Coefficient 223.15≤ T<273.16K 273.16≤T≤313.15K
A1 0.106025 0.905436
A2 2.683845 -0.213781
A3 -4.75638 0.26005
Application of an equation of state to a mixture requires substituting mixture

parameters for those of the pure component. The mixture parameters are
related to pure component parameters by means of the mixing rules [16]
nc nc
am ( T ) = ∑ ∑ xi xj aij ( T ) (16)
i = 1j = 1
and
nc
bm = ∑ xi bi , (17)
i=1
where nc is the number of components in the mixture. The mole fraction of

each component, x i , serves as a weight factor and the cross coefficients a ij ( T )
of the a -term
C–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
a ij ( T ) = a i ( T )a j ( T ) [ 1 – k ij ( T ) ] (18)
are corrected with a temperature-dependent binary interaction parameter [14]
T - – 1⎞
k ij ( T ) = k ij, 0 + k ij, 1 ⎛ --------------- , (19)
⎝ 273.15 ⎠
where the coefficients k ij, 0 and k ij, 1 , listed in Table C–4, are typically
determined by fitting vapor-liquid equilibrium data of binary mixtures with
k ij = k ji and k ii = k jj = 0 .
Table C–4 Binary interaction parameters [14]
Component Component
i j k ij, 0 k ij, 1
i j
1 Water 2 Methane 0.6510 -1.3850
1 Water 3 Ethane 0.6350 -0.9300
1 Water 4 Nitrogen 0.4800 0
1 Water 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.1840 0.2360
1 Water 6 Propane 0.5300 0
1 Water 7 i-Butane 0.6900 0
1 Water 8 n-Butane 0.5000 0
1 Water 9 neo-Pentane 0.5000 0
1 Water 10 i-Pentane 0.6900 0
1 Water 11 n-Pentane 0.5000 0
1 Water 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.5000 0
2 Methane 3 Ethane -0.0026 0
2 Methane 4 Nitrogen 0.0311 0
2 Methane 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.0919 0
2 Methane 6 Propane 0.0140 0
2 Methane 7 i-Butane 0.0133 0
2 Methane 8 n-Butane 0.0230 0
2 Methane 9 neo-Pentane 0.0422 0
2 Methane 10 i-Pentane 0.0256 0
2 Methane 11 n-Pentane 0.0180 0
2 Methane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0056 0
3 Ethane 4 Nitrogen 0.0515 0
3 Ethane 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.1322 0
3 Ethane 6 Propane 0.0011 0
3 Ethane 7 i-Butane -0.0067 0
3 Ethane 8 n-Butane 0.0096 0

Table C-4 Binary interaction parameters [14]
Component Component
i j k ij, 0 k ij, 1
i j
3 Ethane 9 neo-Pentane 0.0230 0
3 Ethane 10 i-Pentane 0.0160 0
3 Ethane 11 n-Pentane 0.0078 0
3 Ethane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0100 0
4 Nitrogen 5 Carbon Dioxide -0.0170 0
4 Nitrogen 6 Propane 0.0852 0
4 Nitrogen 7 i-Butane 0.1033 0
4 Nitrogen 8 n-Butane 0.0800 0
4 Nitrogen 9 neo-Pentane 0.0930 0
4 Nitrogen 10 i-Pentane 0.0922 0
4 Nitrogen 11 n-Pentane 0.1000 0
4 Nitrogen 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.1496 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 6 Propane 0.1241 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 7 i-Butane 0.1200 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 8 n-Butane 0.1333 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 9 neo-Pentane 0.1260 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 10 i-Pentane 0.1219 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 11 n-Pentane 0.1222 0
5 Carbon Dioxide 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.1100 0
6 Propane 7 i-Butane -0.0078 0
6 Propane 8 n-Butane 0.0033 0
6 Propane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0
6 Propane 10 i-Pentane 0.0111 0
6 Propane 11 n-Pentane 0.0267 0
6 Propane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.0007 0
7 i-Butane 8 n-Butane -0.0004 0
7 i-Butane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0
7 i-Butane 10 i-Pentane 0 0
7 i-Butane 11 n-Pentane 0 0
7 i-Butane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0
8 n-Butane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0
8 n-Butane 10 i-Pentane 0 0
8 n-Butane 11 n-Pentane 0.0174 0
8 n-Butane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0056 0
C–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
Table C-4 Binary interaction parameters [14] (Continued)
Component Component
i j k ij, 0 k ij, 1
i j
9 neo-Pentane 10 i-Pentane 0 0
9 neo-Pentane 11 n-Pentane 0 0
9 neo-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0
10 i-Pentane 11 n-Pentane 0.0600 0
10 i-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0
11 n-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0
An equilibrium condition for each component can be derived in terms of the

fugacity coefficient [17]
l v
ϕi xi = ϕi yi , (20)
l
where ϕ i is the fugacity coefficient of component i in the liquid phase, x i is the
v
mole fraction of component i in the liquid phase, ϕ i is the fugacity coefficient
of component i in the gaseous phase, and y i is the mole fraction of component
i in the gaseous phase. For the PR-EOS, the fugacity coefficient is defined as
[17]
bi
lnϕ i = ------ ( Z – 1 ) – ln ( Z – B * )
bm
, (21)
A* ⎛ b 2 ai ( T ) ⎞ Z + B*( 1 + 2 )
– ----------------- ⎜ -----i- – -------------------- ∑ x j a i ( T ) ( 1 – k ij )⎟ ln -------------------------------------
2 2B * ⎝ b m am ( T ) ⎠ Z + B*( 1 – 2 )
j
2
where Z is the compressibility factor for the mixture, A * = a m ( T )P ⁄ ( RT ) and
B * = b m P ⁄ ( RT ) .
The compressibility factor is calculated from an equivalent form of Eq. (10)
implicit in the compressibility factor [17]
3 2 2 2 3
Z – ( 1 – B * )Z + ( A * – 2B * – 3B * )Z – A * B * + B * + B * = 0 . (22)
Given the mole fractions of the components of the gaseous mixture, y i , the
dew point temperature is solved for iteratively by means of successive
substitution using the following procedure:
1. Guess T.
l v
2. Estimate the initial equilibrium ratios K i = ϕ i ⁄ ϕ i using the Wilson
–1
approximation K i = ( P c ⁄ P )exp [ 5.373 ( 1 + ω i ) ( 1 – T r i ) ] [18].
i
3. Estimate the initial liquid mole fractions x i = y i ⁄ K i .

v
4. Calculate Z using Eq. (22) and ϕ i using Eq. (20) with the vapor mole
fractions, y i .

l
5. Calculate Z using Eq. (22) and ϕ i using Eq. (20) with the liquid mole
fractions, x i .
v l
6. Recalculate the liquid mole fractions x i' = x i ( ϕ i ⁄ ϕ i ) .
7. Repeat steps 5 & 6 until x i' – x i ≅ 0 .
8. Adjust T and repeat steps 2-7 until ∑ xi' ≅ 1 .
i
Method Comparisons for Natural Gas
Measured dew point temperatures versus water content from the GERG report
[14] for two pressures, 5bar and 100bar, are shown in Figure C–1, Figure C–2,
Figure C–3 and Figure C–4 along with calculated results using the ASTM1,
ASTM2 and ISO methods described above. The gas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4
and NG7 are specified in Table C–5.
Table C–5 Experimental gas compositions [14]
Component NG1 NG3 NG4 NG7

Methane (CH4) 0.98210 0.88204 0.86483 0.70148
Ethane (C2H6) 0.00564 0.08360 0.06203 0.02520
Nitrogen (N2) 0.00840 0.00912 0.04871 0.01499
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 0.00109 0.00000 0.00167 0.25126
Propane (C3H8) 0.00189 0.01763 0.01552 0.00394
i-Butane (C4H10) 0.00029 0.00293 0.00214 0.00067
n-Butane (C4H10) 0.00038 0.00441 0.00315 0.00074
neo-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00001 0.00003 0.00002 0.00003
i-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00007 0.00020 0.00061 0.00029
n-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00006 0.00004 0.00067 0.00022
Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) 0.00007 0.00000 0.00064 0.00118
C–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
4
10
Natural Gas NG1
Water Content [mg/Nm3]

10 3
P=5 bar
P=100 bar
10 2
ASTM1
ASTM2
ISO
GERG Meas.
1
10
250 300 350
Temperature [K]
Figure C–1 Comparison of calculation results for

ASTM1 [8], ASTM2 [9] and ISO [10] methods with
experimental data from the GERG report [14] for
mixture NG1
4
10
Natural Gas NG3

10 3 P=5 bar
P=100 bar
2
10
ASTM1
ASTM2
ISO
GERG Meas.
1
10
250 300 350
Temperature [K]

mixture NG3

4
10
Natural Gas NG4

10 3
P=5 bar
P=100 bar
10 2
ASTM1
ASTM2
ISO
GERG Meas.
1
10
250 300 350
Temperature [K]

mixture NG4
4
10
Natural Gas NG7

10 3
2
10
ASTM1
ASTM2
ISO
GERG Meas.
1
10
250 300 350
Temperature [K]

mixture NG7
C–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
The ASTM1 method agrees well with the experimental data at low pressure
(5 bar) but deviates significantly at higher pressure (100 bar), especially at
higher temperatures where the calculated dew points are always too high.
Given that the ASTM1 method is based on ideal gas assumptions, it is expected
that real gas behavior typical of the higher pressures would not be sufficiently
reproduced.
Being of similar origin as the ASTM1 method, the ASTM2 method exhibits
similar behavior, albeit with even less agreement, especially at lower
temperatures where the calculated dew points are always too low (with the
exception of the CO2-rich NG7 mixture at high pressure). Thus, if water content
calculated by the ASTM2 method is used to control a drying process, water
condensation may occur due to prematurely reaching the prescribed dew point.
Discrepancies between the two ASTM methods is most likely due to the fact
that data for a simple binary methane-water system was used in the
development of the ASTM2 method [9].
The experimental water content data for the mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7
at 60 bar are summarized in Figure C–5. Relative deviations between the
courses tend to increase with decreasing dew point temperature. These
deviations (~5K between NG4 and NG7 at 34mg/Nm3) illustrate the
importance of accounting for the gas composition, especially when performing
calculations with low water content at moderate to high pressure. Of the three
methods discussed, only the ISO method takes into account the actual gas
composition.
3
10
P=60 bar
10 2
NG1
NG3
NG4
NG7
1
10
250 260 270 280 290 300
Temperature [K]
Figure C–5 Courses of measured water contents at

60 bar for natural gas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and
NG7

The ISO method is applicable to natural gas mixtures with compositions within
the limits listed in Table C–6. Dew point temperatures calculated from water
contents were validated to be generally within ±2K for pressures
0.5≤P≤10MPa and dew point temperatures 258.15≤T≤278.15K [14]. Due to
the solid thermodynamic basis on which the method was developed, an
extended working range of 0.1≤P≤30MPa and 223.15≤T≤313.15K is also
considered valid [10]. Beyond the extended working range, however, the
uncertainty in calculated dew point temperature is unknown.
Table C–6 Range of composition applicable to ISO method [10]
Compound mol %
Methane (CH4) ≥40.0
Ethane (C2H6) ≤20.0
Nitrogen (N2) ≤55.0
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ≤30.0
Propane (C3H8) ≤4.5
i-Butane (C4H10) ≤1.5
n-Butane (C4H10) ≤1.5
neo-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5
i-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5
n-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5
Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) ≤1.5
In summary, for moderate to high water contents at low pressures, all three
correlations produce acceptable results. Although somewhat more difficult to
implement, the ISO method is arguably the more accurate of the methods
(especially for low water contents and high pressures) and provides a great
deal more range and flexibility.
The Arden Buck Method Comparison

The Arden Buck method was developed for air at near-atmospheric pressure
and can be used for air and nitrogen backgrounds. The Arden Buck method can
be used as an approximation of dew point in natural gas streams with very high
levels of methane and inert gases, but as heavier hydrocarbons and CO2
concentrations increase, the Arden Buck method is unable to compensate for
the interaction of the various molecules. Errors as high as 10°C will be reported
in typical natural gas streams at typical pipeline pressures. Therefore, the use
of the Arden Buck method should generally be avoided for natural gas streams.
C–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation
References
[1] McNaught, A. D. and Wilkinson, A., eds., Compendium of Chemical
Terminology: IUPAC Recommendations (2nd Edition), Blackwell
Science, Malden, MA, 1997.
[2] ISO 13443: Natural Gas – Standard Reference Conditions, International
Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland, 1996.
[3] Wagman, D. D., Evans, W. H., Parker, V. B., Schumm, R. H., Halow, I., S
Bailey, S. M., Churney, K. L. and Nuttall, R. L., “The NBS Tables of
Chemical Thermodynamic Properties,” J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, Vol. 11,
Suppl. 2, 1982.
[4] The SI Metric System of Units and SPE Metric Standard, Society of
Petroleum Engineers of AIME, Richardson, TX, 1984.
[5] Ibrahim, O. ed., Annual Statistical Bulletin, Organization of the
Petroleum Exporting Countries, Vienna, Austria, 2008.
[6] “Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases,” 29 CFR-Labor,
Chapter XVII, Part 1910, Sect. 1910.110 and 1910.111, 1993.
[7] Prausnitz, J. M., Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria,
Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1969.
[8] ASTM D 1142-95: Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Content of
Gaseous Fuels by Measurement of Dew Point Temperature, ASTM
International, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, 2006.
[9] Bukacek, R. F., “Equilibrium Moisture Content of Natural Gases,”
Research Bulletin 8, Institute of Gas Technology, 1955.
[10] ISO 18453: Natural Gas-Correlation between Water Content and Water
Dew Point, International Organization for Standardization, Geneva,
Switzerland, 2006.
[11] Buck, A. L. (1981), “New equations for computing vapor pressure and
enhancement factor”, J. Appl. Meteorol. 20: 1527–1532
[12] Buck Research Instruments, LLC, “Model CR-1A Hygrometer with Autofill
Operating Manual”, Appendix 1: Humidity Conversion Equations, May
2012.
[13] Saul, A. and Wagner, W., “International Equations for the Saturation
Properties of Ordinary Water Substance,” J Phys Chem Ref Data,
16:893-901, 1987.
[14] Oellrich, L. R. and Althaus, K., “Relationship between Water Content and
Water Dew Point keeping in consideration the Gas Composition in the
Field of Natural Gas,” GERG Technical Monograph TM14, Verein Deutsher
Ingenieure, Duesseldorf, 2000.
[15] Peng, D. Y. and Robinson, D. B., “A New Two-Constant Equation of State,”
Ind. Eng. Chem. Fundam., 15(1):59-64, 1976.

[16] Copeman, T. W. and Mathias, P. M., “Recent Mixing Rules for Equations
of State,” in Chao, K. C. ed., Equation of State: Theories and
Applications, ACS SYmposium Series 300:352-370, 1986.
[17] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Poling, B. E., The Properties of Liquids
and Gases (4th Edition), McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, New
York, 1987.
[18] Wilson, G., “A Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation of State Applicable to
General Physical Data Calculations,” Paper No. 15C, 65th AIChE National
meeting, May, 1968.
[19] Avila, S., Blanco, S. T., Valesco, I., Rauzy, E. and Otin, S.,
“Thermodynamic Properties of Synthetic Natural Gases Part 4. Dew Point
Curves of Synthetic Natural Gases and their Mixtures with Water:
Measurement and Correlation,” Fluid Phase Equilibria 202:399-412,
2002.
C–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix D: Certifications of
Conformity
Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: *,33915 Master Contract: **3//5
Project: *33/A/3 Date Issued: @$';$

F(*,+*
Issued to: SpectraSensors, Inc.
11027 Arrow Route
Rancho Cucamonga, CA 91730
USA
Attention: Paul Silva
The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA

Mark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for
Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' for
US only or without either indicator for Canada only.

Issued by:

PRODUCTS
CLASS 2258 02

!"#
CLASS 2258 82

!"#
$
!"%"$!! #

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, T4;

$& #"!
%

$!
$ '($)*+,,-./

$0
!$ !+,,*1,2 (3,45,(
+,36 78(+9*12 # ! !+85.' 78$' $
!
$$1:
$"# # ';"$#!
#<$%*,=!
>5,=8
$) #! !
!"#<%
$7!$
# ) ##$ !"#?
# !"@$ !"#<?
.?+3*3,2(A.88#! !:+83.88#! !
B?+A*12(+.88#! !:+.88#! !
BB3,F$@8*,+*,3** <$?+
Operator’s Manual D–1

Certificate: *,33915 Master Contract: **3//5
Project: *33/A/3 Date Issued: @$';$

F(*,+*

!$?

+8" $
!"%" !"#$#! $!$ ##$ !"#% #$7!$
# )$@" $!!$
$) #! !
@"$;
!$$)*+,,!
$< '#"!
8
*8. $
!"%"$$@" $'!;$ ##$ !$!!$
$) #! !
@"$;$)*+,,8"# )"#! )) !"#%
!"
!"#!$"#!$#$ )" !"#";C$ !!
$@"$;!$) ) !
"! @"#<C
"" !"#8
A8%!$ $
!"%"$$@" $ ##$ !$!!$
$) #! !%!$$)*+,,!
$< '#"!

!$' $
!
$ $"<$
! #1 ! ' 7"'' ';"$#!%5,=(!$#!$)$!$' ));$ "<#$!$
!$' $
!
$ $%!$ !! $$@" $8

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
.4.**8*8,/+&$#$
)$D"
$'$#!E # " #)$ !
" )$(
!
.4.**8*8/1/+ $ " )
$# )
$
.4.**8*8*+A+/9F## $#"@$)$ !
" )D" '$#!%
$"#) (B"@""#*

!"#
.4.**8*85+,+,+,1 %$!$D"
$'$#!%
)$ !
" )D" '$#!%
$
$'$#!(#!
)
# ;
!
$
!+?&$#$
)$D"
$'$#!
.4.+*8+*8,+*,,F## $#"@$)$ !
" )D" '$#!%
$"#) #(B"@""#*()
B"@""#+ #*
-) "%"$0 !"#
3,++!"!"## )
$%
)$ !
" )D" '$#!
5+,+,+-*#"!"#0 %$!$D"
$'$#!%
)$ !
" )D" '$#!%
$
$'$#!(#!
) #
;
!
$
!+?&$#$
)$D"
$'$#!
BB3,F$@8*,+*,3** <$?*
D–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Certifications of Conformity
Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: (.2-4B3 Master Contract: ((2@@3
Project: (4.3-43 Date Issued: ;(('(.--

Issued to: SpectraSensors, Inc.
11027 Arrow Route
Rancho Cucamonga, CA 91730
USA
Attention: Mathias Schrempel
The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA

Mark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for
Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' for
US only or without either indicator for Canada only.

Issued by:

PRODUCTS
CLASS 2258 02 !
CLASS 2258 82 !
" #" !
$%
&'!(')*$'+'!
")! #" ",' "&(-../((.. " -.0-(.1'2./3.'(24
5,678
",*" " "9: ;" "59: ; " "78"!!,<"! !="#(.> ?3.>8
+%
&'!(')*$'+'!
")! #" ",' "&(-../((..5 &"-! (7 " -09(1'
-..(4.1'2./3.8
",*" " "9!!,<"! !="#(.> ?2.>8
2.B "8(..@.@.- ="%-
Operator’s Manual D–3

Certificate: (.2-4B3 Master Contract: ((2@@3
Project: (4.3-43 Date Issued: ;(('(.--
APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
$/$((8(8.@-)"!"& "A","! ! !&" & "'
$/$((8(8.84(..4+! !=#&" &A*,"! 5 " ")! !=7
$/$((8(8@4@4*"&*"!&"
$/$((8(8(-9-@0B!!"! "&" &A*,"! #"!&'!(
!
$/$((8(8-4(-@0B"! &A*,"! ! &
$/$-(8-(8.-(..B!!"! "&" &A*,"! #"!&! '!('
&!-! ($ 5&#" 7 !
2.-- ; !!&"#&" &A*,"!
2.0-B ; !! &! &A*,"!

2.B "8(..@.@.- ="%(
D–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

INDEX
4-20 mA current loop 2–15, 4–33, 7–19 Current 1–4
Current loop 2–15, 4–22, 7–14
A Calibrating 4–33, 7–19
Receiver 2–17, 2–18
Absorption profile 1–5 Current loop receiver 4–34
AC connection terminal block 2–11
Acentric factor C–5
Acetone B–2 D
Acetone-impenetrable gloves B–4, B–6, Data
B–7 Diagnostic 4–6, 4–7, 5–4
Alarm relays 2–17, 2–18 Channel A 7–5
Alarms 4–35 Download 7–5
Concentra High Alarm 7–20 Data string 5–5, 8–4
General Fault Alarm 3–12, 3–14, DC connection terminal block 2–12
4–2, 4–35, 4–37, 7–20 DC systems 2–12
High Concentration Alarm 7–20, Detector 1–3
8–18 Dew point temperature C–2
Low Concentration Alarm 7–20 Dry cycle 2–3
System Faults 4–35
User Alarms 4–37
Concentra High Alarm 4–21, 4–37
E
Concentra Low Alarm 4–37 Electric traced tubing 3–3, 3–4
Validation 1 Failed/Validation 2 Electric tracer 3–4
Failed Alarm 4–37 Electrical noise B–1, B–8
Validation Fail Alarm 4–40 Enclosure
Attenuation 1–4 Electronics 2–9, 2–10, 2–11, 2–12,
2–19
B H2O 2–10, 2–15, 2–17, 2–21
H2S 2–10, 2–15, 2–17, 2–18,
Background gas 4–28, 4–29, 4–33, 4–40, 2–19
7–19, 7–22 Heated 2–13
Beer-Lambert absorption law 1–4 Enclosure heater 2–10, 2–12
Energizing the circuit 4–1
C Erroneous readings 2–25
Ethernet port 6–1
Calibrating the analyzer 4–41 Active Start Hostlist 6–8
Cautions 1–1 Active Start Modem Mode 6–8
Cleaning Baud rate 6–4
Gas sampling lines B–1 Change Setup 6–4
Mirrors B–2 Channel Configuration 6–4
COM port B–17 Configuration Port 6–1
COM properties 5–1, 5–3, 8–1, 8–3 Connect Mode 6–6, 6–10
Concentration 4–3, 4–7, 4–22, 7–3, 7–5, ConnectMode 6–13
7–14 Data configuration 6–3
Connecting the control valve source 2–23 Data connection 6–3
Contamination 4–41, 7–22, B–1 Data Port 6–1
Mirrors 1–6 DHCP name 6–3, 6–4
Control system Disconnect Mode 6–13, 6–14, 6–17
Tracer 3–4 DisConnMode 6–13
Critical pressure C–4 DisConnTime 6–16
Critical temperature C–4 Flow control 6–5
Operator’s Manual Index–1

Flush Mode 6–14 Laser Curnt Low Alrm 4–36

Full Verbose 6–11 Laser Power High 4–36
Gateway address 6–2 Laser Power Low 4–36
Interface Mode 6–4 Laser Zero High Alarm 4–36
IP Address 6–1 Laser Zero Low Alarm 4–36
IP address 6–2, 6–3, 6–8, 6–11 Low Purge Rate Alrm 4–36
Manual Mode 6–9 New Scrubber Alarm 3–12, 4–36
Maximum Transmission Unit 6–18 Null Fail Error 7–21
Modem Control In 6–7, 6–9 PeakTk Restart Alarm 4–36, B–8
Modem Mode 6–7, 6–9, 6–10, 6–12, Power Fail Error 7–20
6–13 Pressure High Alarm 4–36
Monitor Mode 6–3, 6–9, 6–11, 6–18, Pressure too Low 4–36
6–21 PT Fail Error 7–21
Netmask 6–2 R2 Restart Alarm 4–37
Pack Control 6–14, 6–15 R3 Restart Alarm 4–37
Port 77F0 6–20 Spectrum Fail Error 7–21
Port 77FE 6–19 Temp High Alarm 4–37
Port number 6–6 Temp Low Alarm 4–37
Quiet Mode 6–10 Temperature too High 4–2, 4–37
Retrycounter 6–8 Temperature too Low 4–2, 4–37
Retrytimeout 6–8 Track Fail Error 7–21
Send characters 6–16 Faults/Alarms
Serial port 6–4 Assignable Alarm 4–19, 4–20,
Setup Mode 6–1, 6–3, 6–19 4–39, 5–16
Excessive sampling gas pressure B–1, Concentra High Alarm 4–19, 4–20,
B–8, B–11 4–39
Excessive sampling gas temperature Concentra Low Alarm 4–20, 4–39
B–1, B–8, B–11 DeltaDC Restart Alrm 4–20
External data logger 7–14 DeltaT Restart Alarm 4–20, 4–39
Fitting Restart Alrm 4–20, 4–39
F Flow Switch Alarm 4–20
Flow Switch Alarm 1 4–39
Faults FracShft Restrt Alrm 4–21, 4–39
DeltaDC Restart Alrm 4–35 General Fault Alarm 4–23
DeltaT Restart Alarm 4–36 H2O
Fit Restart Alarm 4–36 Assignable Alarm 2–15, 2–18
Flow Switch Alarm 4–36 General Fault Alarm 2–15, 2–18
FracShift Restart Alarm 4–36 H2O
H2O General Fault Alarm 7–20
Null Fail B–13 H2O
P/T Fail B–14 High Concentration Alarm
Power Fail B–12 2–18
Spectrum Fail B–13 H2O
Track Fail B–10, B–14 High Concentration Alarm
H2S 7–20
Laser Power too Low B–1, B–2, Low Concentration Alarm 7–20
B–11 Null Fail Error 7–21
Pressure too High B–8, B–12 PT Fail Error 7–21
Pressure too Low B–8, B–12 Spectrum Fail Error 7–21
Temperature too High B–8, Track Fail Error 7–21
B–12, B–13 H2S
Temperature too Low B–8, Assignable Alarm 2–15, 2–17
B–12, B–13 General Fault Alarm 2–15,
Laser Curnt High Alrm 4–36 2–17, 2–18
Index–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index
Historical Alarm Flag Codes 4–38 Initialization period 4–2, 7–2

Laser Curnt Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38 Installation 2–1, 2–8
Laser Power Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38 Intermediate calculation 4–7, 7–5
Laser Powr High Alrm 4–20, 4–38 Isopropanol B–4, B–6
Laser Zero High Alrm 4–20, 4–38
Laser Zero Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38
Lasr Curnt High Alrm 4–20, 4–38
K
Low Purge Rate Alrm 4–39 Keypad 4–3, 7–3
Need New Scrubber! 4–19 H2O 7–3
New Scrubber Alarm 4–21, 4–39 H2S 4–3
PeakTk Restart Alarm 4–20, 4–39 Modes 7–4
Pressr Restart Alarm 4–21, 4–39
Pressure High Alarm 4–20, 4–39
Pressure Low Alarm 4–20, 4–38,
L
4–39 Laser beam 1–3
R2 Reset Alarm 4–39 Laser output fluctuations 1–5
R2 Restart Alarm 4–21 LCD display 4–2, 7–2
R3 Restart Alarm 4–21, 4–39 Leak detector 2–22, 2–23, 2–24, B–2
Temp High Alarm 4–20, 4–38, 4–39 Leaks B–1
Temp Low Alarm 4–20, 4–38, 4–39 Lens cleaning cloth B–6
Val 1 Fail Alarm 4–20 Lens tissue B–4
Val 2 Fail Alarm 4–20 Liquid phase C–2
Validation Fail Alarm 4–29, 5–21 Lock-in amplifier 1–6
Validation Fail Alarm 1 4–39
Validation Fail Alarm 2 4–39 M
Field-pressure reducing station 3–2, 3–4,
Mass fraction C–1
3–5, 3–7, 3–9
Mating terminal block 2–15, 2–16, 2–17,
Start up 3–4
2–18, 2–20
Firmware version 8–16
Maximum sample supply pressure 3–8
Flowmeter 3–9, 3–13, 7–21, 7–22
Measurement parameters 4–2, 7–2
Bypass 3–5, 3–8, 3–9
Measurement units 4–3, 7–3
Sample 3–4, 3–5, 3–7
Membrane separator B–1
Microsoft Excel 8–5
G Mirror contamination 1–6, B–2
Gas leaks 2–22, 2–23, 2–24, B–1, B–2 Modbus communications 5–8
Gas sampling line B–2 Framing/protocol 5–8
Gas solubility C–2 Modes
Gas standard 3–12, 3–14, 4–40, 7–21 H2O
Gateway IP Address 6–2 Mode 1 (Normal Mode) B–10
Ground wire 2–12, 2–14 Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode)
B–10
Mode 4 (System Diagnostic
H Parameters) B–10, B–13,
H2O Keypad 7–3 B–14
H2S Keypad 4–4 Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data
Hardware 2–8 Download) B–12, B–13, B–14
Heated enclosure 2–14 H2S
HyperTerminal 5–1, 8–1 Mode 1 (Normal Mode) B–17
Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data
I Download) B–11
Mode ^ (Normal Mode) 5–7
Ideal gas C–2 Mode 1 (Normal Mode) 4–5, 5–7,
Import stored data into spreadsheet 8–5 5–11, 7–3, 7–4, 7–9, 8–5, 8–14,
Incident intensity 1–4 B–9

Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode - H2O) Concentration (ppmv) 5–5

8–4 Current Midpoint 5–5
Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode - H2S) Dry DC 5–5
7–4 Dry Pressure 5–5
Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–5, Dry Temp 5–5
4–8, 4–39, 5–1, 5–6, 5–10, 7–4, DryDC 4–6
7–7, 7–9, 7–20, B–9 DryPressure 4–6
Mode 2, Change Parameters (Set DryTemp 4–6
Parameter Mode) 4–13 Fit 4–6
Mode 3 (Scrubber Life Data) 4–8 Fit Ratio 5–5
Mode 3 (Set Parameter Mode) 7–5, Fit Ratio 2 5–5
8–4, 8–14 Fit Ratio 3 5–6
Mode 3 Not Used 4–5 Fit Ratio 4 5–6
Mode 4 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–6 Fit Ratio 5 5–6
Mode 4 (System Diagnostic Fit Ratio Dry 5–6
Parameters) 4–6, 7–5 Fit Ratio Dry-1 5–6
Mode 5 (Analog Output Test Mode) Fit Residue 5–5
4–7 Index Difference 5–5
Mode 5 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–7 Indx 8–4, 8–17
Mode 5 (System Diagnostic Mid 4–7
Parameters) 7–5 Peak Index 5–5
Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data Download) PkD1 7–21, 8–4, 8–16
4–7, 4–29, 5–6, 5–7, 5–21, 7–5, PkDf 7–21
8–4, 8–5, 8–9 Powr 8–17
Mode 6 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–7 PP2F 8–4, 8–17
Mode 7 (Measure Port1 Mode) 4–8 Process Path Fig 5–5
Mode 8 (Not Used) 4–8 Ref Index 5–5
Mode 9 (Recall Validation Results) Val Fig 5–5
4–9 Wet DC 5–5
Mode TEST (Analog Input Test Mode) Wet Temp (C) 5–5
4–9 WetDC 4–6
Mode TEST (System Test) 7–6 WetPressure 4–6
Modes and functions 4–4 WetPressure (mb) 5–5
Molecular weight C–1 WetTemp 4–6
Zero 8–4, 8–17
N Input
Concentration Unit 4–17
National Institute of Standards and Custom Precision 4–18
Technology 4–41, 7–22 DO Alarm Setup 4–19, 4–39
Natural frequencies 1–4 New Scrub Installed 4–23
Nitrogen purge 3–8 Val Attempts 4–29
Normal cubic meter C–1 Val Duration 4–30
Normal reference conditions C–1 Val Purge Period 4–31
Validation Allowance 4–29
O Zero Val Tolerance 4–29, 4–32
Measurement and control 4–9
Optional analyzer hood 2–9 # Spectrum Average 5–6, 8–4,
Output Signal 8–17
4-20 mA current loop 2–15 2 Way Com Port 4–13, 5–11
Serial output 2–15 20 mA Value 7–11, 8–17
4 mA Value 7–11, 7–20, 8–17
P 4-20 mA % Test 7–10, 7–20,
8–18
Parameters
4-20 mA Alarm Action 7–10,
Diagnostic
7–20, 8–17
Alarm Flags 5–6
Index–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index
4-20 mA Alarm Option 4–14 S Factor Offset 7–17, 7–18,

4-20 mA Test 4–7, 4–33, 4–34 8–16
4-20 mA Val Action 4–14 Sample ID 7–16
4-20mA Alarm Option 4–14, Set Time - Day 4–26
4–15, 4–16, 4–35 Set Time - Hour 4–27
AI 20 mA Value 4–15 Set Time - Minute 4–27
AI 4 mA Value 4–15 Set Time - Month 4–27
AI Pressure Input 4–15 Set Time - Year 4–27
Analyzer ID 7–11 Start Validation 4–28, 4–40
AO 20 mA Test 4–16 Temperature Unit 4–28, 7–11,
AO 20 mA Value 4–16 7–17, 8–17
AO 4 mA Value 4–15 User Password 7–18, 8–18
AO 4-20 mA Test 4–34 Val 1 Concentration 4–28,
Baud Rate 4–16 4–30, 5–21
Calculate Dew Point 4–16 Val 2 Concentration 4–29,
Calculate DewPoint 4–17 4–30, 5–21
Cancel Scrub Alarm 4–27 Val Auto DumpSpectrm 4–29
Cancel Val Alarms 4–17, 4–37 Val Interval 4–30, 4–40
Component ID 7–12 Val Perm Constant Kp 4–30
Concentration Unit 7–12, 8–17 Val Perm Constant Rp 4–31
Daily Validation 4–19, 4–40 Val Start Time 4–19, 4–32, 4–40
DO Alarm Delay 7–13, 8–18 Validation Allowance 4–28,
DO Alarm Setup 7–13, 8–18 4–30
General Alarm DO 4–21, 4–35, View and change 7–7
B–9 Zero Val Tolerance 4–28
H2O Password 4–13, 4–33, 5–10, 7–4, 7–9,
Peak Tracking B–10 8–13, 8–15, 8–16, 8–18, B–9
High Alarm Setpoint 4–21 PeakTk 4–36
Keypad Watchdog 4–22 Pin numbers 2–16, 2–17
Logger Rate 4–22, 7–14, 8–17 Port
Low Alarm Setpoint 4–22 Check gas 7–21
Low Power Warning 7–15, Pneumatic valve air or N2 supply 2–23
7–20, 8–18 Pressure relief vent 2–23
Modbus Address 4–23, 5–10, Sample return 2–23
5–11, 7–15, 8–14, 8–17 Sample supply 2–22, 3–5
Modbus Mode 4–23, 5–1, 5–8, Validation gas 7–21
5–11, 7–15, 8–1, 8–14, 8–18 Power input requirements 2–9
New Scrub Installed 3–12, Power terminal box 2–13, 2–14
3–14 Powering down the analyzer 4–2
Peak Tracking 4–24, 7–2, 7–16, Powering up the analyzer 4–1
8–17, B–9 Pressure regulator 3–1, 3–4, 3–5, 3–6,
Pipeline Pressure 4–15, 4–24, 3–9
8–17
Powr 8–4 R
Pressure Unit 4–25, 7–16, 8–17
Raoult’s law C–2, C–3
Process Purge Time 4–25
Raw data 1–4
Rapid Change Monitor 4–25
Recommendations and solutions to
RATA 4–25
common problems 4–38, 7–21, B–1
RATA Multiplier 4–26, 4–32,
Reference state C–1
4–33
Resonances
RATA Offset 4–26, 4–32, 4–33
Natural frequencies
S Factor 7–17, 7–18, 8–16

Return materials authorization (RMA) Tools and supplies B–2

number B–18 Trace gas measurement (mixed
RS-232 Output 8–1 background) 1–6
Tracer 3–4
S Tunable diode laser (TDL) 1–3
Tunable diode laser absorption
Sample bypass 3–4, 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, 3–9, spectroscopy (TDLAS) 1–3
3–13
Sample bypass stream
Start up 3–5 U
Sample cell B–1 Units 4–28
Sample cell pressure 4–3, 7–3 Concentration 4–17, 7–12
Sample cell temperature 4–3, 7–3 Pressure 4–25, 7–16
Sample condition system (SCS) B–7 Temperature 4–28, 7–17
Sample conditioning system (SCS) 1–3,
3–1, 3–10, B–5
Preventative and demand
V
maintenance 3–10 Validation 4–40, 4–41, 7–21
Sample gas 1–3 Validation source 4–28, 4–29
Sample probe 3–1, 3–2, 3–3, 3–5, 3–6, Valve
3–9 Check gas 7–21, 7–22
Saturated water vapor C–3 Metering 3–4, 3–5, 7–21, 7–22
Saturation C–2 Relief 3–3, 3–4
Saturation vapor pressure C–4 Sample probe isolation 3–4
Saving data from the serial port 5–6 Sample supply hut-off 3–8
Scroll direction 4–13 Shut-off 3–4, 3–5
Scrubber 2–3, 3–13 Sample system 3–4
Service 3–11 Validation gas 7–21, 7–22
Scrubber and scrubber efficiency Valves
indicator replacement 3–13 Check 3–8
Scrubber efficiency indicator 3–12, 3–13, Isolation 3–1, 3–2, 3–6, 3–9
3–14 Metering 3–7, 3–9
Serial cable 2–15, 2–16, 2–17 Relief 3–7, 3–8, 3–9
Serial connection 2–15 Sample probe isolation 2–21
Serial port 2–17, 2–18, 5–6, 8–4 Shut-off 3–7, 3–8, 3–9
Service contact B–17 Header 3–7, 3–9
Shutdown analyzer Solenoid 2–3
Short-term 3–7 Switching 2–3
Signal wires 2–16, 2–17 Vapor phase C–2
Spectra Vent line 3–3
2f 4–7, 7–5, 8–10 Volume fraction C–1
DC 4–7, 7–5
Stainless steel tubing 2–21, 2–22, 2–23,
B–1
W
System conditioning 2–25 Warnings
System Faults DCdelta out of range 4–35
Pressure Restart Alarm 4–37 Delta P out of range 4–34
Delta T out of range 4–34
Dry P out of range 4–34
T Fitting out of range 4–35
Temperature 4–3 FracShift out of range 4–35
Temperature controller General 1–1
Electric tracer 3–4 H2S
Tools 2–8 Fit Delta Exceeds Limit B–15
Index–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index
Low Power Warning 7–20, 8–18

Peak Tracking 4–35
R2 out of range 4–35
R3 out of range 4–35
Unable to do validation 4–35
Water content C–1, C–3
Water dew point C–2
Wet cycle 2–3
WMS signal detection 1–6

Index–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

H2O Analizer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

H2O Analizer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2-Pack Analyzer

4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

4333 W Sam Houston Pkwy N, Suite 100

Copyright © 2013 SpectraSensors, Inc. No part of this manual may be reproduced in

Revision Engineering Order Date

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

3: Sample Conditioning System

To start up the analyzer on process sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

4: Operating the H2S Analyzer

ii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Pressure Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

5: Firmware FS 5.13 Serial Port Communications

Operator’s Manual iii

Setup Mode: Server Configuration (Option 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

7: Operating the H2O Analyzer

iv 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Modes Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

8: Firmware v2.50 Serial Port Communications

Appendix B: Troubleshooting the Analyzer

Appendix C: Water Correlation

Appendix D: Certifications of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

vi 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Figure 1–1. Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption spectrometer............ 1-4

Figure 2–1. General system hardware outline ............................................... 2-2

Figure 4–1. H2S keypad (FS 5.13 Firmware) ................................................. 4-4

Figure 5–1. Connection Description window (FS 5.13).................................... 5-2

Operator’s Manual vii

Figure 7–1. H2O analyzer keypad (v2.50 Firmware)....................................... 7-3

Figure 8–1. Connection Description window (v2.50) ...................................... 8-2

Figure A–1. Standard outline schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system.................. A-3

Figure B–1. Measurement cell types ............................................................ B-3

viii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table 2–1. H2S analyzer fuse specifications ................................................. 2-3

Table 4–1. Typical values for parameter setpoints ........................................ 4-9

Table 5–1. Modbus register map [FS 5.13]................................................ 5-11

Table 6–1. BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options....................................................... 6-2

Table 8–1. Modbus register map [v2.50]................................................... 8-15

Table A–1. Analyzer specifications.............................................................. A-1

Table B–1. Potential instrument problems and solutions .............................. B-11

Table C–1. Common reference conditions.................................................... C-2

Table C–4. Binary interaction parameters [14] ............................................. C-7

x 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Who Should Read This Manual

How to Use This Manual

General Warnings and Cautions

General notes and important information concerning the

Operator’s Manual 1–1

Warning statement for hazardous voltage. Contact may cause

Failure to follow all directions or substitution of components may

Failure to follow all directions may result in fire.

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION - Avoid exposure to beam.

Failure to follow all directions may result in damage or

! Maximum voltage and current specifications for the fuse closest

Conventions Used in this Manual

1–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

About the Gas Analyzers

How the Analyzers Work

Operator’s Manual 1–3

Figure 1–1 Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption

I ( λ ) = I 0 ( λ )exp [ – σ ( λ )lN ] , (1)

1–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

output power to increase. By normalizing the signal by the incident intensity,

Figure 1–2 Typical raw signal from a laser diode